Watlow Electric Marine Instruments 986m987 User Manual
Series 988  
User’s Manual  
Includes 986, 987, 988 and 989  
1/8 DIN Microprocessor-Based Temperature/Process Controller  
User Levels:  
• New User........................... go to Introduction  
• Experienced User................... go to page 4.1  
Installers:  
96  
• Set-up..................................... go to page 1.1  
• Wiring & Installation................ go to page 2.1  
TOTAL  
3Ye a rWa rra nty  
ISO 9001  
Registered Company  
Winona, Minnesota USA  
Watlow Controls  
1241 Bundy Blvd., P.O. Box 5580, Winona, MN, USA 55987-5580, Phone: (507) 454-5300, Fax: (507) 452-4507  
0600-0009-0001 Rev V  
December 1997  
$10.00  
Made in the U.S.A.  
Supersedes: W988-XUMN Rev U00  
Printed on Recycled Paper 10% Postconsumer Waste  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Introduction to the Watlow Series 988  
Controllers  
Chapter 6  
The Factory Menus  
ii  
ii  
iii  
iii  
iii  
Using this Manual  
6.1 Navigating the Factory Menus  
6.2 Panel Lockout Menu  
6.7 Diagnostics Menu  
Document Every Step  
Notes, Cautions and Warnings  
Technical Assistance  
6.13 Calibration Menu  
We Value Your Feedback  
Chapter 7  
Chapter 1  
Hardware Setup  
Tuning, Manual Operation,  
Alarms and Error Codes  
1.1 Dip Switch Locations and Functions  
7.1 Auto-tuning (Heat and/or Cool)  
7.2 Manual Tuning  
Chapter 2  
7.4 Manual and Automatic Operation  
7.5 Changing the Output 3 Alarm Jumper  
7.6 Using Alarms  
7.8 Error Code E1 and E2 Messages  
7.9 Error Code Actions  
Installation and Wiring  
2.1 Panel Cutout and Dimensions  
2.2 Installing the Series 988  
2.4 Wiring the Series 988  
2.4 Input-to-output Isolation  
2.4 Power Wiring  
Chapter 8  
2.5 Sensor Installation Guidelines  
2.6 Wiring Example  
General Software  
8.2 Burst Fire  
2.8 Input 1 Wiring  
2.9 Input 2 Wiring  
8.4 Communications  
8.6 Dead Band  
2.11 Event Input 1 Wiring  
2.12 Output 1 Wiring  
2.13 Output 2 Wiring  
8.8 Digital Events  
8.10 Heater Current  
8.12 Input Filter  
2.14 Output 3 Wiring  
2.15 Output 4 Wiring  
8.14 Input Linearization  
8.16 Ramp to Set Point  
8.18 Remote Set Point  
8.20 Retransmit  
Chapter 3  
Front Panel and Display Loop  
3.1 Keys and Displays  
3.2 Display Loop  
8.22 Slidewire Feedback  
Chapter 9  
Enhanced Software  
9.2 Cascade  
9.6 Differential  
9.8 Dual PID Sets  
9.10 Duplex  
Chapter 4  
The Setup Menus  
4.1 Navigating the Setup Menus  
4.2 Input Menu  
4.18 Output Menu  
9.12 Ratio  
4.34 Global Menu  
4.44 Communications Menu  
Appendix  
A.2 Glossary  
Chapter 5  
A.4 Specifications  
The Operation Menus  
5.1 Navigating the Operation Menus  
5.2 System Menu  
A.5 Warranty and Returns  
A.6 Index  
A.10 Menu Overview  
A.11 Model Number – Ordering Information  
A.12 Declaration of Conformity  
5.9 PID A and PID B Menus  
Table of Contents  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to the  
Watlow Series 988 Controllers  
Figure Int.1 -  
The Series 988  
Controllers.  
Watlow’s Series 988 controllers set a new standard in the controller indus-  
try by packing an impressive array of features into an 1/8-DIN package.  
No other controller offers the flexibility, compact size and durability of the  
Series 988. It can control a wide variety of temperature and process appli-  
cations, with a broad range of input and output options that allow control  
of virtually any process variable.  
The Series 988 is the only 1/8 DIN controller that can provide single-unit  
cascade control of a process. Its other features include heater current  
monitoring, remote set point input, ratio control and valve control through  
slidewire feedback. The Series 988 also delivers expanded auto-tuning  
capabilities, increased alarm functionality and several unique control algo-  
rithms.  
When we refer to the “Series 988” controller, we refer also to the horizontal  
and low-voltage versions of the Series 988: the 986, 987, 988 and 989. We  
recommend that you read all of this manual’s introduction to familiarize  
yourself with the conventions and content of this manual and the steps to  
setting up a Series 988 controller. Make sure you understand the  
“Caution” and “Warning” symbols we use in the book.  
Introduction  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Using this Manual  
This manual provides the information you will need to install and operate  
a Series 988 controller.  
If you need information about Series 988 configurations and model num-  
bers, refer to the Appendix of this manual or, for more detailed informa-  
tion, to Optimizing Your Proces s Sys tem w ith the Series 988 Controller: An  
Applica tion Guide for the Wa tlow Series 988 Fa mily.  
If your Series 988 controller will be used for data communications, you  
will also need our communications manual, Da ta Communica tions w ith the  
Wa tlow Series 988 Fa mily of Controllers (green cover).  
˜
Series 988 controllers are calibrated in the factory, but if you need to do  
periodic calibration you will need our calibration manual, Ca libra ting  
Wa tlow Proces s Controllers, (blue cover).  
NOTE:  
The 12-digit number  
is printed on the top  
of the stickers on  
each side of the  
controller’s case  
and on the right-  
hand or top circuit  
board.  
This manual explains the five steps of setting up a Series 988 controller:  
1. Set and document all of the DIP switches, if applicable: Chapter 1.  
2. Mount the controller: Chapter 2.  
3. Wire and document the controller wiring: Chapter 2.  
4. Configure and document the controller software: Chapters 3-6.  
5. Run, test and adjust your application. Update documentation.  
˜
Chapters 7 and 8 and the Appendix provide detailed advice, definitions  
and specifications along with application examples to help you optimize  
the safety and performance of your application. Use the Table of Contents  
and Index to find specific information.  
NOTE:  
The Menu Overview  
in the Appendix  
shows all the  
menus and  
prompts.  
Document Every Step  
The Series 988 provides powerful and complex features. Carefully docu-  
ment each step of the setup and any subsequent changes. This will make  
it much easier to change, adjust and troubleshoot your application.  
Make the configuration documentation available to engineers and techni-  
cians, on all shifts, who may need to work with the Series 988. We provide  
space in this manual to record configurations. You may prefer to photo-  
copy the blank forms and keep them in a separate binder. However you  
maintain your documentation, be sure to replace all old copies of the doc-  
umentation with updated versions whenever the controller configuration is  
changed.  
Introduction  
ii  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Notes, Cautions and Warnings  
We use note, caution and warning symbols throughout this book to draw  
your attention to important operational and safety information.  
A bold text “NOTE” marks a short message in the margin to alert you to  
an important detail.  
A bold text “CAUTION” safety alert appears with information that is  
important for protecting your equipment and performance. Be especially  
careful to read and follow all cautions that apply to your application.  
A bold text “WARNING” safety alert appears with information that is  
important for protecting you, others and equipment from damage. Pay  
very close attention to all warnings that apply to your application.  
The ç symbol (an exclamation point in a triangle) precedes a general  
CAUTION or WARNING statement.  
The Ó symbol (a lightning bolt in a triangle) precedes an electric shock  
hazard CAUTION or WARNING safety statement.  
Technical Assistance  
If you encounter a problem with your Watlow controller, review all of your  
configuration information for each step of the setup to verify that your  
selections are consistent with your applications.  
If the problem persists after checking all the steps, you can get technical  
assistance by calling Watlow Controls at (507) 454-5300, between 7 a.m.  
and 5 p.m. CST, and asking for an applications engineer. When you call  
have the following information on hand: the controller’s model number  
(the 12-digit number is printed on the top of the stickers on each side of  
the controller’s case and on the right-hand or top circuit board); your  
user’s manual; all configuration information; and the Diagnostics Menu  
readings.  
We Value Your Feedback  
Your comments and suggestions on this manual are welcome. Please send  
them to, Technical Writer, Watlow Controls, 1241 Bundy Blvd., P.O. Box  
5580, Winona, MN 55987-5580 or call (507) 454-5300 or fax (507) 452-  
4507.(1233)  
Introduction  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Setup  
DIP Switch Locations and Functions  
The Watlow Series 988 has at least one and as many as six dual in-line  
package (DIP) switches inside the controller, depending on the model  
number. They allow users to configure the controller for a variety of input  
sensors, to provide power for external signal conditioners or to lockout  
front panel access to some functions.  
To set any DIP switch:  
• Remove the controller from the case by pressing firmly on the two release  
tabs on one side or the top of the bezel until they unsnap. Then firmly  
press the two release tabs on the opposite side or the bottom of the con-  
trol until they unsnap. You will need to gently rock the bezel back and  
forth to release it from the chassis.  
• Use the illustrations on the following pages to locate and set each DIP switch.  
WATL  
W
PROCESS  
Release  
Tabs  
Release  
Tabs  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
% OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
Release  
Tabs  
W
ATL  
W
DSPY  
MODE  
Figure 1.1 - Press  
the release tabs to  
remove the con-  
troller chassis.  
PROCESS  
DEV  
AUTO  
MAN  
% OUT  
SERIES 989  
L1  
L2  
L3  
L4  
Release  
Tabs  
Hardware Setup, Chapter 1  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
1.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIP Switches  
1. Set the input DIP  
switches to match the  
sensors you are using  
in your application.  
Only controllers with  
model number 98_ _-  
2_ _ _-_ _ _ _ or 98_ _-  
_2_ _-_ _ _ _ have an  
input DIP switch.  
Input 2 DIP  
Input 1 DIP  
ON  
ON  
˜
NOTE:  
Controller Chassis  
Rear View  
The Input 2 DIP  
switch is mounted  
upside down.  
Input 1  
Input 2  
(98 _ _-2_ _ _-_ _ _ _)(98 _ _-_2_ _-_ _ _ _)  
˜
NOTE:  
↑
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
N
O
O
N
↑
Only controllers  
with the indicated  
model numbers  
have these DIP  
switches.  
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
RTD (100 Ω)  
↑
N
O
O
N
↑
thermocouple: R, S or B  
↑
N
O
O
N
↑
thermocouple: J, K, T, N, E, C, D, Pt2  
or 0-50mV (high impedance)  
↑
N
O
Figure 1.2 -  
Input DIP switches.  
O
N
↑
0-20 or 4-20mA; 0-5, 1-5 or 0-10V  
Hardware Setup, Chapter 1  
1.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIP Switches  
2. Set DIP switches for  
outputs equipped with  
an external signal con-  
ditioner power supply.  
Only controllers with  
model number 98_ _-_  
_ _T-_ _ _ _, 98_ _-_ _ _  
_-T_ _ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _  
_-_T_ _ have an exter-  
nal signal conditioner  
power supply.  
Output 1  
Option Board  
on  
off  
Output 2  
Option Board and DIP  
Output 4  
Option Board and DIP  
off  
off  
on  
on  
Output 3  
Option Board and DIP  
˜
NOTE:  
For other voltages  
or current settings  
contact the factory.  
Controller Chassis  
Top View (986 & 988)  
Left-side View (987 & 989)  
˜
NOTE:  
Output 2  
Output 3  
Output 4  
Only controllers  
with the indicated  
model numbers  
have these DIP  
switches.  
(98 _ _-_ _ _T-_ _ _ _) (98 _ _-_ _ _ _-T_ _ _) (98 _ _-_ _ _ _-_T_ _)  
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
20V ± 5% @ 30mA  
12V ± 5% @ 30mA  
5V ± 5% @ 30mA  
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
Figure 1.3 -  
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
External signal con-  
ditioner power sup-  
ply DIPs.  
3. When the DIP switches are set, gently insert the controller chassis into  
the case and push it firmly into place until all four tabs snap into place.  
Hardware Setup, Chapter 1  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
1.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIP Switches  
4. The lockout DIP switch  
hides the Setup Menus  
(Input, Output, Global and  
Communications) and the  
Factory Menus (Panel  
ç
CAUTION:  
The lockout DIP  
switch makes the  
Setup and Factory  
menus unavailable.  
Configure all the  
Setup and Factory  
menus before lock-  
ing them out. Fail-  
ure to do so could  
result in damage to  
equipment in the  
event of a setup  
error.  
Lockout, Diagnostics and  
Calibration). All units have  
a lockout DIP switch.  
1
2
1
2
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
no hardware lockout  
(Switch 1 has no effect.)  
or  
or  
1
2
1
2
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
lockout Setup and Factory menus  
(Switch 1 has no effect.)  
Figure 1.4 -  
Lockout DIP switch.  
Commu-  
nications  
[COM  
Input  
Output  
Global  
[InPt]  
[`SEt]  
[OtPt] [GLbL]  
[`SEt]  
[`SEt]  
[`SEt]  
Panel  
Lockout  
[PLOC]  
Diagnostics Calibration  
[diAG] [`CAL]  
[Fcty]  
[Fcty]  
[Fcty]  
Hardware Setup, Chapter 1  
1.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring  
W
ATL  
W
˜
4.03"  
NOTE:  
(102mm)  
Space panel  
cutouts at least 1.66  
inches (42.2mm)  
apart.  
PROCESS  
W
ATL  
W
4.03"  
(102mm)  
DSPY  
MODE  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
2.18"  
(55 mm)  
DEV  
PROCESS  
DISPLAY  
% OUT  
DEV  
% OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
SERIES 989  
L1  
L2  
L3  
L4  
MODE  
˜
SERIES 988  
NOTE:  
2.18"  
(55 mm)  
Adjustable mount-  
ing brackets can be  
side-mounted.  
Adjustable  
Mounting Bracket  
Panel  
Panel Cutout  
˜
Maximum Panel  
Thickness  
0.38" (9.65mm)  
NOTE:  
Holes can be cut in  
the panel using a  
Greenlee 1/8 DIN  
Hydraulic Kit  
#60068 (punch  
#60069, die #60070).  
3.62" + 0.03 -0.00  
(92mm + 0.8)  
Figure 2.1 -  
Series 988 and  
Series 989  
dimensions and  
terminal number  
layout.  
4.06"  
(103 mm)  
0.68"  
(17 mm)  
1.77 + 0.02 -0.00  
(45mm + 0.6)  
1
11  
22  
12  
21  
2
3
13  
14  
20  
11  
4
5
15  
16  
13  
14  
17  
19  
24  
12  
22  
18  
15  
16  
17  
6
7
8
9
23  
9
21  
4
5
3
6
7
2
8
10  
1
18  
19  
23  
24  
10  
20  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
2.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Installing the Series 988  
Installing and mounting requires access to the back of the panel.  
1. Make a panel cutout using the panel cutout dimensions from the previ-  
ous page.  
2. To remove the controller chassis from its case, press in firmly on the two  
tabs on one side or the top of the bezel until they unsnap, then unsnap  
the two tabs on the opposite side or the bottom. Pull the chassis out of  
the case by gently rocking it.  
˜
NOTE:  
3. Slide the case into the panel cutout. Check to see that the gasket is not  
twisted, and is seated within the case bezel flush with the panel. Slide  
Removing the con-  
troller chassis from  
its case makes  
mounting easier.  
Side (986 or 988)  
or Top and Bottom (987 or 989) View  
Top and Bottom (986 or 988)  
or Side (987 or 989) View  
Adjustable  
Mounting Bracket  
Panel  
Figure 2.2 -  
Side and top view.  
Release Tabs  
Mounting Slots  
Bezel  
External Gasket  
Mounting Collar  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
2.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
the mounting collar over the back of the control.  
4. Loosen the mounting bracket screws enough to allow for the mounting  
collar and panel thickness. Place each mounting bracket into the  
mounting slots (head of the screw facing the back of the controller).  
Push each bracket backward then down to secure it to the control  
case. To guarantee a proper NEMA 4X seal, Series 986 and 988  
units (vertical) must have the mounting brackets located on either  
sid e of the unit. When installing Series 987 and 989 units (horizon-  
tal) the brackets must be on the t op a n d bot t om of the unit.  
5. Make sure the case is seated properly. Tighten the installation screws  
firmly against the mounting collar to secure the unit. To ensure a  
NEMA 4X seal, there should be no space between the bezel and  
panel. Overtightening the screws will distort the case and make it diffi-  
cult to remove or replace the controller.  
ç
CAUTION:  
Follow the installa-  
tion procedure  
exactly to guarantee  
a proper NEMA 4X  
seal. Make sure the  
gasket between the  
panel and the rim of  
the case is not  
6. Make sure the inside gasket is seated properly and not twisted.  
Insert the controller chassis into its case and press the bezel until all  
four tabs snap.  
7. To release the mounting brackets, loosen the mounting bracket screws  
and push the brackets forward, then pull it up and out.  
twisted and is seat-  
ed properly. Failure  
to do so could  
result in damage to  
equipment.  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
2.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring  
Wiring the Series 988  
∫
WARNING:  
Wiring options depend on the model number and DIP switch settings.  
Check the terminal designation stickers on either side of the controller  
and compare your model number to those shown here and with the model  
number breakdown on the inside back cover of this manual.  
To avoid potential  
electric shock, use  
National Electric  
Code (NEC) safety  
practices when  
Input-to-output Isolation  
wiring and connect-  
ing this unit to a  
power source and  
to electrical sensors  
or peripheral  
devices. Failure to  
do so could result  
in injury or death.  
The Series 988 uses optical isolation between the analog inputs and the  
controller outputs/digital input. This isolation provides a 500VÅ (ac) bar-  
rier to prevent ground loops when using grounded sensors and/or periph-  
eral equipment.  
Here is a breakdown of the isolation barriers:  
• Analog inputs 1 and 2 are grouped together.  
• Outputs 1 through 4 and the standard event input are grouped together.  
This does not apply to Output 4 when configured as communications.  
• The digital communications output (4) is separate from the above  
groups.  
˜
NOTE:  
Input-to-output iso-  
lation is defeated  
when the external  
signal conditioner  
power supply is  
used to power a  
transmitter con-  
nected to input 1 or  
input 2.  
Power Wiring  
100 to 240V‡ (ac/dc) nominal, (85 to 264 actual)  
L1  
+
L2  
-
Vertical Package  
Horizontal Package  
98 8 _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
98 9 _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
fuse  
21  
22  
11  
earth ground  
24 to 28 V‡ (ac/dc) nominal, (20 to 30 actual)  
Vertical Package  
Horizontal Package  
98 6 _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
98 7 _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
Figure 2.4 -  
Power wiring.  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
2.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring  
Sensor Installation Guidelines  
Maintain isolation between input 1 and input 2 to prevent a ground loop.  
A ground loop may cause incorrect readings, dashes across the upper dis-  
play or the display of error codes.  
ç
CAUTION:  
The Series 988 will  
not function with  
two grounded ther-  
mocouple inputs.  
Avoid using a  
grounded thermo-  
couple for both  
input 1 and input 2.  
Failure to follow this  
guideline could  
result in damage to  
equipment.  
Thermocouple input: Extension wire for thermocouples must be of the  
same alloy as the thermocouple itself to limit errors.  
Using grounded thermocouples for both input 1 and input 2 may create  
ground loop problems. To correct this problem, replace at least one of the  
grounded thermocouples with an ungrounded thermocouple. If the appli-  
cation requires grounded thermocouples, use an isolated transmitter,  
such as a Watlow Gordon 5702 isolated transmitter.  
RTD (100 Ω) input: Each 1Ω of lead wire resistance can cause a +2°C  
error when using a two-wire RTD. A three-wire RTD sensor overcomes this  
problem. All three wires must have the same electrical resistance (i.e.,  
same gauge, same length, multi-stranded or solid, same metal).  
NOTE:  
Input-to-output iso-  
lation is defeated  
when the external  
signal conditioner  
power supply is  
used to power a  
transmitter connect-  
ed to input 1 or  
input 2.  
Process input: Isolation must be maintained between input 1 and input  
2. If both input 1 and input 2 are used as process inputs, a separate  
power supply and transmitter must be used for each input. Output option  
T (external signal conditioner power supply) can be used to supply power  
for only one input.  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
2.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring Example  
∫
WARNING:  
To avoid potential  
electric shock, use  
L1  
National Electric  
Code (NEC) safety  
practices when  
120VÅ (ac)  
L2  
high-temperature  
light  
earth ground  
wiring and connect-  
ing this unit to a  
power source and  
to electrical sen-  
sors or peripheral  
devices. Failure to  
do so could result  
in injury or death.  
high-limit  
mechanical  
contactor  
coil  
fuse  
21 22 11  
12 (+)  
(-)  
1
5
SSR-240-10A-DC1  
out dc input  
92A3-1DJ1-0000  
limit control  
13  
SSR  
1
4
2
3
in  
heater  
(+)  
9
ç
13  
11  
14  
10 (-)  
red  
10  
+
-
WARNING:  
988A-10CA-AARR  
rear view  
Install high or low  
temperature limit  
control protection  
in systems where  
an over tempera-  
ture fault condition  
could present a fire  
hazard or other haz-  
ard. Failure to  
install temperature  
limit control protec-  
tion where a poten-  
tial hazard exists  
could result in dam-  
age to equipment,  
property and injury  
to personnel.  
optional  
normally open  
momentary switch  
process sensor  
limit sensor  
120VÅ (ac)  
L2  
L1  
21  
22  
11  
1
3
2
1
Series 988  
988A-10CA-AARR  
temperature control  
4
5
(+)  
(-)  
2
3
9
10  
12  
13  
ç
4
6
7
SSR-240-10A-DC1  
solid-state relay, dc input  
WARNING:  
in  
3-32VÎ (dc)  
To avoid damage to  
property and equip-  
ment, and/or injury  
of loss of life, use  
National Electric  
Code (NEC) stan-  
dard wiring prac-  
tices to install and  
operate the Series  
988. Failure to do  
so could result in  
such damage,  
(-)  
(+)  
1 CR-1  
heater  
10  
5
out  
2
2
9
8
1
24-240VÅ (ac)  
1
13  
14  
2
6
1
7
11  
12  
13  
Series 92  
92A3-1DJ1-0000  
limit control  
8
(+)  
(-)  
14  
15  
9
10  
10  
11  
11  
4
3
1CR  
16  
and/or injury or  
death.  
2
2
12  
1
13  
17  
5
R
18  
high-temperature light  
Figure 2.6 -  
System wiring  
example.  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
2.6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring Notes  
L1  
L2  
earth ground  
22  
11  
21  
power  
ç
WARNING:  
To avoid damage to  
property and equip-  
ment, and/or injury  
of loss of life, use  
National Electric  
Code (NEC) stan-  
dard wiring prac-  
tices to install and  
operate the Series  
988. Failure to do  
so could result in  
such damage,  
and/or injury or  
death.  
˜
NOTE:  
Sketch in your  
application on this  
page or a copy of it.  
See wiring exam-  
ples in this chapter  
and in the Appen-  
dix.  
Figure 2.7 -  
Wiring notes.  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
2.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input 1 Wiring  
Figure 2.8a — Thermocouple or 0-50mV (high impedance)  
˜
NOTE:  
Thermocouple only  
98 _ _ - 1 _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ (no DIP switches)  
Successful installa-  
tion requires five  
steps:  
• Model number and  
software choice  
(Appendix);  
• DIP switch set-  
tings (Chapter 1);  
• Sensor match  
(Chapter 2 and  
Appendix);  
Universal signal conditioner  
98 _ _ - 2 _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
+
-
9
1
2
3
1
2
3
O
N
↑
O
N
↑
10  
J, K, T, N, C, E, D, Pt2,  
0-50mV DIP Settings  
R, S, B  
DIP Settings  
+
-
9
Input impedance: 20MΩ  
10  
0-50mV  
• Sensor installation  
(Chapter 2); and  
• Wiring (Chapter 2).  
Figure 2.8b — RTD (2- or 3-wire) (100 Ω)  
Jumper  
Universal signal conditioner  
#9 to #10  
98 _ _ - 2 _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
for 2-wire  
RTD  
1
2
3
S1  
S2  
8
9
O
N
↑
S1  
S2  
8
9
S3 10  
DIP Switch  
Setting  
10  
Î
Î
Î
Figure 2.8c — 0-5V , 1-5V or 0-10V (dc) Process  
Universal signal conditioner  
98 _ _ - 2 _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
Input impedance: 10KΩ  
DIP Switch  
Setting  
+
-
9
10  
Figure 2.8d — 0-20mA or 4-20mA Process  
Universal signal conditioner  
98 _ _ - 2 _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
-
Input impedance: 7Ω  
8
DIP Switch  
Setting  
+
10  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
2.8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input 2 Wiring  
Figure 2.9a — Thermocouple or 0-50mV (high impedance)  
NOTE:  
Successful installa-  
tion requires five  
steps:  
Thermocouple only  
98 _ _ - _ 1 _ _ - _ _ _ _ (no DIP switches)  
• Model number and  
software choice  
(Appendix);  
• DIP switch set-  
tings (Chapter 1);  
• Sensor match  
(Chapter 2 and  
Appendix);  
Universal signal conditioner  
98 _ _ - _ 2 _ _ - _ _ _ _  
↑
↑
N
O
N
O
19  
20  
+
-
3
2
1
3
2
1
0-50mV  
R, S, B  
DIP Settings  
J, K, T, N, C, E, D, Pt2,  
0-50mV DIP Settings  
Input impedance: 20MΩ  
19  
20  
+
-
• Sensor installation  
(Chapter 2); and  
• Wiring (Chapter 2).  
Figure 2.9b — RTD (2- or 3-wire) (100 Ω)  
Jumper  
Universal signal conditioner  
0  
98 _ _ - _ 2 _ _ - _ _ _ _  
↑
N
18  
19  
18 S1  
S1  
O
3
2
1
S2  
19  
S2  
DIP Switch  
Setting  
S3  
20  
20  
Î
Î
Î
Figure 2.9c — 0-5V , 1-5V or 0-10V (dc) Process  
↑
N
O
Universal signal conditioner  
3
2
1
98 _ _ - _ 2 _ _ - _ _ _ _  
DIP Switch  
Setting  
Input impedance: 10KΩ  
19  
20  
+
-
Figure 2.9d — 0-20mA or 4-20mA Process  
Universal signal conditioner  
↑
N
O
3
2
1
98 _ _ - _ 2 _ _ - _ _ _ _  
DIP Switch  
Setting  
-
18  
20  
Input impedance: 7Ω  
+
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
2.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input 2 Wiring  
NOTE:  
Figure 2.10a — Slidewire Feedback or Potentiometer Input  
See Chapter 8 for  
information on  
slidewire feedback.  
98 _ _ - _ 3 _ _ - _ _ _ _  
18  
CCW  
19  
Wiper  
20  
CW  
˜
NOTE:  
A process output  
cannot be installed  
on output 1 when  
using a current  
transformer input.  
Figure 2.10b — Current Transformer Input  
98 _ _ - _ 4 _ _ - _ _ _ _  
L2  
The current transformer must be pur-  
chased separately. See Appendix for  
Watlow current transformer part  
numbers.  
Load wire  
CT  
19  
20  
Center leg not used  
L1  
Single-phase  
NOTE:  
Systems that use more than 50 Amps  
need an interstage transformer. For  
example, if you use a 300A current  
transformer, part #16-0073, and an  
interstage transformer, part #16-  
0176, the 300A current transformer  
provides a 5A signal to the interstage  
transformer. In turn, the transformer  
sends a 20mA maximum signal to the  
controller.  
Successful installa-  
tion requires five  
steps:  
• Model number and  
software choice  
(Appendix);  
• DIP switch set-  
tings (Chapter 1);  
• Sensor match  
(Chapter 2 and  
Appendix);  
Phase  
dot  
T1  
19  
20  
T3  
T2  
3-phase using 2 current transformers  
• Sensor installation  
(Chapter 2); and  
• Wiring (Chapter 2).  
Figure 2.10c — Digital Event Input 2  
98 _ _ - _ 5 _ _ - _ _ _ _  
open 0-3VÎ (dc) Event Input 2 off  
closed 14-36VÎ (dc) Event Input 2 on  
18  
20  
19  
20  
+
-
+5VÎ (VDC)  
Internal Circuitry  
100Ω  
4.7KΩ  
.01µf  
1KΩ  
750Ω  
18  
19  
20  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
2.10 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Input 1 Wiring  
Figure 2.11a — Digital Event Input 1  
NOTE:  
Successful installa-  
tion requires five  
steps:  
Available on all units.  
OPTO  
ISOLATOR  
• Model number and  
software choice  
(Appendix);  
open 14-36VÎ (dc) Event Input 1 off  
closed 0-3VÎ (dc) Event Input 1 on  
4.99KΩ  
.01µf  
• DIP switch set-  
tings (Chapter 1);  
• Sensor match  
(Chapter 2 and  
Appendix);  
• Sensor installation  
(Chapter 2); and  
• Wiring (Chapter 2).  
750Ω  
+24VÎ (dc)  
23 24  
+
-
10KΩ  
4.99KΩ  
Internal Circuitry  
23 24  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
2.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output 1 Wiring  
Figure 2.12a — AC Outputs  
NOTE:  
Successful installa-  
tion requires five  
steps:  
• Model number and  
software choice  
(Appendix);  
• DIP switch set-  
tings (Chapter 1);  
• Sensor match  
(Chapter 2 and  
Appendix);  
• Sensor installation  
(Chapter 2); and  
• Wiring (Chapter 2).  
Solid-state Relay with Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ B _ - _ _ _ _  
0.5 amps, minimum off-state impedance: 20KΩ  
External  
Load  
NO  
12  
L2  
L1  
Electromechanical Relay with Contact Suppression  
(Suppression between NO and COM contacts only)  
98 _ _ - _ _ D _ - _ _ _ _  
13 COM  
Fuse  
14 NC  
(#14 for D & E outputs only)  
Form C, 5 amps, minimum off-state impedance: 20KΩ  
Electromechanical Relay without Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ E _ - _ _ _ _  
Form C, 5 amps off-state impedance: 31MΩ  
Solid-state Relay without Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ K _ - _ _ _ _  
0.5 amps, off-state impedance: 31MΩ  
NOTE:  
Switching inductive  
loads (relay coils,  
solenoids, etc.) with  
the mechanical  
relay or solid state  
relay output options  
requires using an  
R.C. suppressor.  
Watlow carries the  
R.C. suppressor  
Quencharc brand  
name, which is a  
trademark of ITW  
Paktron. Watlow  
Part No. 0804-0147-  
0000.  
Figure 2.12b — Switched DC, Open Collector  
98 _ _ - _ _ C _ - _ _ _ _  
19 to 32VÎ (dc)  
12  
13  
+
-
+
12  
13  
14  
External  
Load  
790Ω  
Maximum voltage: 42VÎ (dc)  
14  
COM  
Maximum current: 1A  
Internal Circuitry  
Figure 2.12c — 0-20mA and 4-20mA Process  
98 _ _ - _ _ F _ - _ _ _ _  
12  
+
-
Maximum load impedance: 800Ω  
14  
Î
Î
Î
Figure 2.12d — 0-5V , 1-5V and 0-10V (dc) Process  
98 _ _ - _ _ F _ - _ _ _ _  
13  
+
Minimum load impedance: 1KΩ  
14  
-
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
2.12 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output 2 Wiring  
Figure 2.13a — AC Outputs  
NOTE:  
Successful installa-  
tion requires five  
steps:  
• Model number and  
software choice  
(Appendix);  
• DIP switch set-  
tings (Chapter 1);  
• Sensor match  
(Chapter 2 and  
Appendix);  
• Sensor installation  
(Chapter 2); and  
• Wiring (Chapter 2).  
Solid-state Relay with Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ B - _ _ _ _  
0.5 amps, minimum off-state impedance: 20KΩ  
Electromechanical Relay with Contact Suppression  
(Suppression between NO and COM contacts only)  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ D - _ _ _ _  
External  
Load  
15  
16  
NO  
L2  
L1  
COM  
Fuse  
NC  
17  
Form C, 5 amps, minimum off-state impedance: 20KΩ  
(#17 for D & E outputs only)  
Electromechanical Relay without Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ E - _ _ _ _  
Form C, 5 amps off-state impedance: 31MΩ  
Solid-state Relay without Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ K - _ _ _ _  
0.5 amps, off-state impedance: 31MΩ  
Figure 2.13b — Switched DC, Open Collector  
NOTE:  
Switching inductive  
loads (relay coils,  
solenoids, etc.) with  
the mechanical  
relay or solid state  
relay output options  
requires using an  
R.C. suppressor.  
Watlow carries the  
R.C. suppressor  
Quencharc brand  
name, which is a  
trademark of ITW  
Paktron. Watlow  
Part No. 0804-0147-  
0000.  
19 to 32VÎ (dc)  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ C - _ _ _ _  
+
15  
790Ω  
16  
Maximum voltage: 42VÎ (dc)  
Maximum current: 1A  
15  
16  
+
-
17  
External  
Load  
Internal Circuitry  
17  
COM  
Figure 2.13c — 0-20mA and 4-20mA Process  
15  
17  
+
98 _ _ - _ _ _ F - _ _ _ _  
-
Maximum load impedance: 800Ω  
Î
Î
Î
Figure 2.13d — 0-5V , 1-5V and 0-10V (dc) Process  
˜
16  
17  
+
-
NOTE:  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ F - _ _ _ _  
Input-to-output iso-  
lation is defeated  
when the external  
signal conditioner  
power supply is  
used to power a  
transmitter connect-  
ed to input 1 or  
input 2.  
Minimum load impedance: 1KΩ  
Figure 2.13e — External Signal Conditioner Power Supply  
Loop powered  
15  
16  
1
2
+
-
Transmitter  
+ V  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ T - _ _ _ _  
4-20mA out  
- V  
+
-
Input  
1 or 2  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
2.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output 3 Wiring  
NOTE:  
Figure 2.14a — AC Outputs  
Successful installa-  
tion requires five  
steps:  
• Model number and  
software choice  
(Appendix);  
NC Form B  
or  
Solid-state Relay with Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - B _ _ _  
0.5 amps, minimum off-state impedance: 20KΩ  
External  
Load  
1
2
NO Form A  
L2  
L1  
COM  
Fuse  
• DIP switch set-  
tings (Chapter 1);  
• Sensor match  
(Chapter 2 and  
Appendix);  
• Sensor installation  
(Chapter 2); and  
• Wiring (Chapter 2).  
Electromechanical Relay without Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - J _ _ _ _  
Form A or B, 5 amps, off-state impedance: 31MΩ  
Form A or B  
alarm jumper  
settings (98__-  
____-J___ only)  
Form A  
Solid-state Relay without Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - K _ _ _ _  
0.5 amps, off-state impedance: 31MΩ  
Form B  
NOTE:  
Figure 2.14b — Switched DC  
Switching inductive  
loads (relay coils,  
solenoids, etc.) with  
the mechanical  
relay or solid state  
relay output options  
requires using an  
R.C. suppressor.  
Watlow carries the  
R.C. suppressor  
Quencharc brand  
name, which is a  
trademark of ITW  
Paktron. Watlow  
Part No. 0804-0147-  
0000.  
19 to 32VÎ (dc)  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - C _ _ _  
1
+
-
External  
Load  
+
1
2
2
790Ω  
Minimum load resistance: 500Ω  
Internal Circuitry  
Figure 2.14c — Process Retransmit  
0-20mA, 4-20mA, Load impedance: 600Ω max.  
1
2
+
-
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - M _ _ _  
NOTE:  
0-5VÎ, 1-5VÎ, 0-10VÎ (VDC), Load impedance: 500Ω min.  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - N _ _ _  
Input-to-output iso-  
lation is defeated  
when the external  
signal conditioner  
power supply is  
used to power a  
transmitter con-  
nected to input 1 or  
input 2.  
Figure 2.14d — External Signal Conditioner Power Supply  
Loop powered  
+ 1  
2
-
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - T _ _ _  
+ V  
- V  
Transmitter  
4-20mA out  
˜
NOTE:  
-
+
Input  
See Chapter 1 for  
power supply DIP  
switch information.  
1 or 2  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
2.14 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output 4 Wiring  
NOTE:  
Figure 2.15a — AC Outputs  
Successful installa-  
tion requires five  
steps:  
• Model number and  
software choice  
(Appendix);  
Solid-state Relay with Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ B _ _  
0.5 amps, minimum off-state impedance: 20KΩ  
• DIP switch set-  
tings (Chapter 1);  
• Sensor match  
(Chapter 2 and  
Appendix);  
External  
Load  
Electromechanical Relay with Contact Suppression  
(Suppression between NO and COM contacts only)  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ D _ _ _  
5
6
NO  
L2  
L1  
COM  
Fuse  
7
NC  
(#7 for D & E outputs only)  
Form C, 5 amps, minimum off-state impedance: 20KΩ  
• Sensor installation  
(Chapter 2); and  
• Wiring (Chapter 2).  
Electromechanical Relay without Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ E _ _ _  
Form C, 5 amps, off-state impedance: 31MΩ  
Solid-state Relay without Contact Suppression  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ K _ _ _  
0.5 amps, off-state impedance: 31MΩ  
NOTE:  
Switching inductive  
loads (relay coils,  
solenoids, etc.) with  
the mechanical  
relay or solid state  
relay output options  
requires using an  
R.C. suppressor.  
Watlow carries the  
R.C. suppressor  
Quencharc brand  
name, which is a  
trademark of ITW  
Paktron. Watlow  
Part No. 0804-0147-  
0000.  
Figure 2.15b — Switched DC, Open Collector  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ C _ _  
19 to 32VÎ (dc)  
5
6
+
-
+
5
6
7
External  
Load  
790Ω  
Maximum voltage: 42VÎ (dc)  
Maximum current: 1A  
7
COM  
Internal Circuitry  
Figure 2.15c — External Signal Conditioner Power Supply  
NOTE:  
98 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ T _ _  
Input-to-output iso-  
lation is defeated  
when the external  
transmitter power  
supply is used to  
power a signal con-  
ditioner connected  
to input 1 or input 2.  
Loop powered  
+ 5  
6
-
+ V  
- V  
Transmitter  
4-20mA out  
˜
-
+
Input  
NOTE:  
1 or 2  
See Chapter 1 for  
power supply DIP  
switch information.  
For data communications wiring refer to Data Communications  
with the Watlow Series 988 Family of Controllers.  
Installation and Wiring, Chapter 2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
2.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Front Panel and Display Loop  
Keys and Displays  
Upper Display  
Lower Display  
Indicates the actual process value,  
prompt parameter value or error  
code.  
Indicates the set point, deviation,  
percent power, temperature unit,  
menu prompt name or alarm code.  
W
ATL  
W
L1, L2, L3, L4  
DEV LED  
These LED’s indicate when output  
1, 2, 3 or 4 are active. Outputs can  
be configured as:  
When lit, the lower display shows  
the most recent deviation unit from  
the set point.  
Ot1  
Ot2  
Ot3  
Ot4  
Control  
PROCESS  
Control or Alarm  
Alarm or Retransmit  
Alarm or Communications  
(flashes on transmit and  
receive)  
% OUT LED  
When lit, the lower display shows  
the current percent output.  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
Up-arrow Key  
Display Key  
DEV  
Increases the value or changes the  
parameter in the upper display  
(except for set point changes in the  
Display Loop, which occur in the  
lower display). Hold the key down  
to increase the value rapidly. New  
data takes effect in five seconds or  
when the Mode key or Display key  
is pressed.  
DISPLAY  
% OUT  
Pressing this key enters the  
Display Loop. Press the Display  
key at any time to return to this  
loop. The next page has more  
information on the Display Loop.  
AUTO  
MAN  
Auto/Man Key  
MODE  
In Manual mode the lower display  
shows percent output. Pressed  
once, it clears any latched alarm. If  
pressed again within five seconds  
it will toggle between Auto and  
Manual mode.  
SERIES 988  
Down-arrow Key  
Decreases the value or changes  
the parameter in the upper display  
(except for set point changes in the  
Display Loop, which occur in the  
lower display). Hold the key down  
to decrease the value rapidly. New  
data takes effect in five seconds or  
when the Mode key or Display key  
is pressed.  
Mode Key  
Enters new data and steps to  
the next prompt in the current  
menu.  
Auto/Man LED  
Lit when the control is in Manual  
operation. Press the Auto/Man key  
twice to enter Automatic operation.  
When blinking, press the Auto/Man  
key to toggle between Auto and  
Manual. After five seconds without  
pressing the Auto/Man key, the  
LED stops blinking and returns to  
its previous state.  
Mode + Up-arrow Keys  
Hold the Mode key then press  
the Up-arrow key to move  
backwards through the cur-  
rent menu. Scrolling stops  
when you reach the top of the  
menu.  
Up + Down Keys  
Press simultaneously for three sec-  
onds to go to the Setup Menu.  
Continue to press both keys for  
another three seconds to go to the  
Factory Menu. Access to the Setup  
and Factory menus can be dis-  
abled with lockout DIP switch.  
Figure 3.1 -  
Series 988 Keys and Displays  
Front Panel and Display Loop, Chapter 3  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
3.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Loop  
Display Loop  
The Display Loop is the “home” state of the Series 988 controller. Pressing  
the Display key ∂ returns the controller to the Display Loop from any  
prompt in any menu. The controller automatically returns to the Display  
Loop from any menu when a minute passes without any keys being  
pressed.  
˜
NOTE:  
For information on  
input 1 [`In1] and  
input 2 [`In2]  
ranges, refer to  
Chapter 4.  
[`988]  
[`988]  
current input 1 reading  
set point 1 (change with Up-arrow > or Down-arrow < key)  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
[`988]  
[Pr`2]  
current input 2 reading  
input 2 process (appears only if controller equipped with input 2 hardware)  
˜
NOTE:  
[`988]  
[`988]  
current input 1 reading  
deviation from set point, process 1 minus set point 1 (DEV light on)  
If [``no] is selected  
for [`In2], in the  
Input Menu, the  
[Pr`2] prompt will  
not appear.  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
[`988]  
[`100]  
current input 1 reading  
percent output (%OUT light on)  
DISPLAY  
[`988]  
[``°C]  
current input 1 reading  
units selected (units, °F or °C)  
Figure 3.2 -  
The Display Loop  
Front Panel and Display Loop, Chapter 3  
3.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 The Setup Menus  
Navigating the Setup Menus  
NOTE:  
When navigating  
To reach the Setup Menus, begin in the Display Loop and press both the Up-  
through menus,  
outputs will be dis-  
abled.  
arrow >and Down-arrow < keys for three seconds. The Setup Menu  
prompt [`SEt]will appear in the lower display, and the Input Menu prompt  
[InPt]will appear in the upper display. The four Setup Menus are: Input  
[InPt]; Output [OtPt]; Global [GLbL]; and Communications [COM]. Use the  
Up-arrow >or Down-arrow <key to select a menu and the Mode key µ  
to step through a menu. The Communications Menu appears only on units  
equipped with the data communications option.  
˜
NOTE:  
You will not see every prompt in any of these menus. The unit’s configuration  
and model number determine which prompts appear. After stepping through  
each menu, the Series 988 returns to the Setup Menu prompt [`SEt]. Use  
the Up-arrow >and Down-arrow <keys to select the next menu, or use  
the Mode key µto advance through the same menu again. To move back-  
wards through the menu hold the Mode key µdown and press the Up-  
arrow key >. Use the Up-arrow >or Down-arrow <key to change the  
prompt setting.  
Press the Display  
key ∂to return to  
the Display Loop  
from any point in  
any menu.  
Refer to the Appendix for model number options. For information about  
communications and the communications prompts, refer to the supple-  
mental manual Da ta Communica tions w ith the Wa tlow Series 988 Fa mily of  
Controllers .  
WATL  
W
PROCESS  
❶ Begin in the Display Loop, and press the Up-arrow  
>and Down-arrow <keys simultaneously to  
reach the Setup Menus.  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
[OtPt] [gLbL] [COm]  
[`Set]  
[Inpt]  
[`Set]  
[`Set]  
[`Set]  
Input  
Menu  
p. 4.2  
Output  
Menu  
Global Communications  
Menu Menu  
Figure 4.1 -  
Navigating the  
Setup Menus.  
p. 4.18 p. 4.34 p. 4.44  
W
ATL  
W
˜
NOTE:  
PROCESS  
❷ Press the Up-arrow key >to select one of the  
Setup Menus.  
The lockout DIP  
switch hides the  
Setup Menus. See  
Chapter 1.  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Inpt]  
[`Set]  
Setup-Input  
Setup Prompt  
Input 1  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
MODE  
[`In1]  
[deC1]  
[`rL1]  
[`rH1]  
[CAL1]  
[rtd1]  
[Ftr1]  
[Lin1]  
[`ln2]  
[`rSp]  
[deC2]  
[`RL2]  
[`RH2]  
[LrnL]  
[LrnH]  
[CAL2]  
[rtd2]  
[Ftr2]  
[Lin2]  
[Hunt]  
[SHYS]  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
Reaching the Input Menu  
*Decimal 1  
Range Low 1  
Range High 1  
Calibration Offset 1  
*RTD Calibration Curve 1  
Software Filter 1  
*Linearization 1  
*Input 2  
WATL  
W
(p. 4.3  
)
Input 1
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
% OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
M
SERIES 988  
❸ Select the Input Menu, then press  
the Mode key µto step through the  
prompts.  
MODE  
*Remote Set Point  
*Decimal 2  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
*Range Low 2  
*Range High 2  
*Learn Low  
…
…
(p. 4.9  
Input 2
)
…
[```0] [```1] [```2] [``60]  
[Ftr1]  
[Ftr1]  
[Ftr1]  
[Ftr1]  
*Learn High  
*Calibration Offset 2  
*RTD Calibration Curve 2  
*Software Filter 2  
*Linearization 2  
*Hunt  
[``no] [root]  
[Lin1]  
[Lin1]  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key >or the  
Down-arrow key <to select one of  
the prompt values.  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
(p. 4.16  
Slidewire (
)
*Prompts may not appear,  
depending on controller  
configuration.  
*Slidewire Hysteresis  
Figure 4.2 -  
The Input Menu.  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Input Prompts  
When you are in the Setup menus, the Series 988 displays the menu selec-  
tion ( [InPt], [OtPt], [GLbL] or [COM] ) in the upper display, and [`SEt] in  
the lower display.  
˜
NOTE:  
Decimal points may  
not always be in the  
position specified  
below depending on  
the the settings in  
the Decimal 1  
[dEC1]and Decimal  
2 [dEC2]parame-  
ters in the Input  
Menu.  
The Up-arrow >or Down-arrow key <selects another menu. Press the  
Mode key µ to display the prompt in the lower display and its value in the  
upper display. Use the Up-arrow >or Down-arrow <key to change the  
value in the upper display. The new value will not take effect until after a  
five-second delay or until you press the Mode key µ.  
Input 1  
[`In1]  
Select sensor type for input 1. This selection must match the sensor type  
connected to terminals 8, 9 and 10. See Appendix for more information  
about sensors.  
• Changing the value of [`In1] changes all other prompts to the factory  
default values, except the Communications and Lockout menus, the  
[`C_F] prompt in the Global Menu and the [`dFL] prompt in the  
Calibration Menu. If you change the value, the default warning [dFLt]  
will flash in the upper display.  
ç
CAUTION:  
Changing the value  
of [`In1]changes  
most other prompts  
to the factory  
• Changes do not take effect automatically after five seconds; you must  
press the Mode key µ to enter the sensor type change and advance to  
the next prompt.  
default values.  
Document all set-  
tings before chang-  
ing sensor type.  
Verify the correct  
sensor type before  
making a change.  
Failure to follow  
this guideline could  
result in damage to  
equipment or prop-  
erty. Document all  
settings before  
[`In1] This prompt always appears.  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
98_ _-1_ _ _-_ _ _ _  
no DIP  
J
K
T
N
E
W5  
W3  
Pt2  
0-50mV  
[```J] [```H] [```t] [```n] [```E] [```C] [```d] [`Pt2] [0-50]  
[`In1]  
thermocouple  
only  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
98_ _-2_ _ _-_ _ _ _  
Input 1 DIP  
J
K
T
N
E
W5  
W3  
Pt2  
0-50mV  
changing sensor  
type.  
[```J] [```H] [```t] [```n] [```E] [```C] [```d] [`Pt2] [0-50]  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
thermocouple  
Input 1 DIP  
[`In1]  
Input 1 continued  
on next pa ge.  
R
S
B
[```r] [```S] [```b]  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
thermocouple  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
If  
↓
Default  
↓
RTD  
[`In1]  
Input 1 continued  
from previous  
pa ge.  
Input 1 DIP  
RTD(0.1°)  
[`rtd] [`r†d]  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
RTD  
Input 1 DIP  
4-20mA  
0-20mA  
0-5VÎ  
1-5VÎ  
0-10VÎ(dc)  
[4-20] [0-20] [`0-5] [`1-5] [0-10]  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
[`In1]  
process  
Decimal 1  
[dEC1]  
Select the decimal point location for process type input 1 data. This  
prompt, in conjunction with the Range Low and Range High prompts,  
allows you to format and limit units of measure for process 1.  
• All prompts with units of measure related to input 1 will display in the  
selected decimal format.  
• This affects propbands, alarm set points, process set points, calibration  
offsets, deadbands and ranges.  
[dEC1] This prompt appears only if you have set input 1 [`In1] to a  
process input or to a thermocouple input set to 0-50mV.  
Default  
↓
[```)] [``)0] [`)00] [)000]  
[dEC1]  
[DEC1]  
[dEC1]  
[dEC1]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Range Low 1 and Range High 1  
[`rL1]  
[`rH1]  
Select the low and high limits for input 1. These prompts limit the  
adjustment range for the set points. The default values are the same as  
the limits of the sensor you selected by setting the input 1 DIP switch and  
selecting a value for Input 1 [`In1].  
• Process inputs are scaled by these values. Range high is the value dis-  
played when the maximum process signal is present at the input. Range  
low is the value displayed when the minimum process signal is present  
at the input.  
˜
NOTE:  
Example:  
Set [`In1] to [4-20]mA.  
These values do not  
affect the low or the  
high set point limit  
for process alarms.  
Set [`rL1] to [`100].  
Set [`rH1] to [`500].  
A 4mA input will display [`100].  
A 12mA input will display [`300].  
A 20mA input will display [`500].  
• The low and high values of each sensor type are listed on the specifica-  
tions page of the Appendix.  
• Choose between Fahrenheit and Celsius at the [`C_F] prompt in the  
Global Menu.  
[`rL1] [`rH1] These prompts always appear.  
Default  
Default  
Default  
Default  
↓
↓
↓
↓
[``°F]  
[``°C]  
˜
[`rL1] [`rH1]  
[`rL1] [`rH1]  
NOTE:  
[```J]  
[``in]  
[``32]…[1500]  
[```0]…[`816]  
98_ _-1_ _-_ _ _ or  
98_ _-2_ _-_ _ _  
When high imped-  
ance [0-50]is  
selected for input 1  
the range high for  
both [``°C]and  
[``°F]can be  
extended to  
[9999]. The range  
low when [``°C]is  
selected can be  
extended to  
[`rL1]  
[`rH1]  
[`rL1]  
[`rH1]  
(K)  
[```H]  
[-328]…[2500]  
[-328]…[`750]  
[``32]…[2372]  
[-328]…[1470]  
[``32]…[4200]  
[``32]…[4200]  
[``32]…[2543]  
[-999]…[`999]  
[-200]…[1371]  
[-200]…[`399]  
[```0]…[1300]  
[-200]…[`799]  
[```0]…[2316]  
[```0]…[2316]  
[```0]…[1395]  
[-573]…[`573]  
[```t]  
[```n]  
[```E]  
(W5)  
[```C]  
[-999].  
(W3)  
[```d]  
[`rL1]  
[`rH1]  
Ra nge Low 1 a nd  
Ra nge High 1  
continued on next  
pa ge.  
[`Pt2]  
high impedance  
[0-50]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
[``°F]  
[``°C]  
[`rL1]  
[`rH1]  
Ra nge Low 1 a nd  
Ra nge High 1  
[`rL1]  
[`rH1]  
[`rL1]  
[`rH1]  
[```r]  
[``32]…[3200]  
[```0]…[1760] 98_ _-2_ _-_ _ _  
only  
[`in1]  
continued from  
previous pa ge.  
[```S]  
[```b]  
[`rtd]  
[`r†d]  
[4-20]  
[0-20]  
[`0-5]  
[`1-5]  
[0-10]  
[``32]…[3200]  
[``32]…[3300]  
[-328]…[1472]  
[-9(9]…[99(9]  
[```0]…[1760]  
[```0]…[1816]  
[-200]…[`800]  
[-7#3]…[53&7]  
˜
NOTE:  
These values do not  
affect the low or the  
high set point limit  
for process alarms.  
[-999]…[9999]  
[-999]…[9999]  
units  
units  
units  
units  
units  
[-999]…[9999]  
[-999]…[9999]  
[-999]…[9999]  
[CAL1]  
Calibration Offset 1  
Offset the input 1 signal by a positive or negative value. This allows you  
to compensate for lead resistance, sensor errors or other factors.  
[CAL1] This prompt always appears.  
If  
Default  
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
(Global Menu)  
↓
[-999] … [```0] … [9999]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[`r†d]  
[`In1]  
[-9(9] … [``)0] … [`9(9]  
&
&
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
(Global Menu)  
(Input Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[-999] … [```0] … [9999]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[`r†d]  
[`In1]  
[-5%5] … [``)0] … [`5%5]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
(Global Menu)  
(Input Menu)  
units  
[-999] … [```0] … [`999]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
[CAL1]  
a process input  
is selected  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
RTD (100Ω) Calibration Curve 1  
[rtd1]  
Select the calibration curve for the RTD 1 input. The RTD input uses  
either the European (DIN, 0.003850Ω/Ω/°C) or the Japanese (JIS,  
0.003916Ω/Ω/°C) linearization standard.  
[rtd1] This prompt appears only if you have set [`In1] to [`rtd] or  
[`r†d].  
Default  
↓
[`din] … [`JIS]  
[rtd1]  
[rtd1]  
Software Filter 1  
[Ftr1]  
Select the filter time constant, in seconds, for input 1. This smooths a  
rapidly changing input signal for display or control purposes.  
• Select a positive value to filter only the display.  
• Select a negative value to filter the input signal.  
• Set the value to [```0] to disable the filter.  
[Ftr1] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[`-60] … [```0] … [``60]  
[Ftr1]  
[Ftr1]  
[Ftr1]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
[Lin1]  
˜
Linearization 1  
Select square root linearization for input 1.  
[Lin1] This prompt appears only if you have set [`In1] to a process input  
or to a thermocouple set to [0-50]mV.  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on input lineariza-  
tion.  
Default  
↓
[``no]  
[Lin1]  
[root]  
[Lin1]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Input 2  
[`In2]  
Select sensor type for input 2. This selection must match the sensor  
type connected to terminals 18, 19 and 20. See Appendix for more infor-  
mation about sensors.  
CAUTION:  
Changing the value  
of [`In2]changes  
most other prompts  
to the factory  
• Changing the value of [`In2] changes all other prompts to the facto-  
ry default values, except the Communications and Lockout menus,  
the [`C_F] prompt in the Global Menu and the [`dFL] prompt in the  
Calibration Menu. If you change the value, the default warning  
[dFLt] will flash in the upper display.  
default values.  
Document all set-  
tings before chang-  
ing sensor type.  
Verify the correct  
sensor type before  
making a change.  
Failure to follow  
this guideline could  
result in damage to  
equipment or prop-  
erty. Document all  
settings before  
• Changes do not take effect automatically after five seconds; you must  
press the Mode key µ to enter the sensor type change and advance to  
the next prompt.  
[`In2] This prompt and other Input 2 prompts appear only on controllers  
equipped with input 2 hardware (not 98_ _-_0_ _-_ _ _ _).  
If  
Default  
changing sensor  
type.  
↓
↓
98_ _-1_ _ _-_ _ _ _  
no DIP  
J
K
T
N
E
W5  
W3  
Pt2  
0-50mV  
[``no] [```J] [```H] [```t] [```n] [```E] [```C] [```d] [`Pt2] [0-50]  
thermocouple  
only  
[``In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
˜
NOTE:  
98_ _-2_ _ _-_ _ _ _  
Input 2 DIP  
If [``no]is selected  
for [`In2]none of  
the other input 2  
prompts will  
J
K
T
N
E
W5  
W3  
Pt2  
0-50mV  
[``no] [```J] [```H] [```t] [```n] [```E] [```C] [```d] [`Pt2] [0-50]  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
appear.  
thermocouple  
Input 2 DIP  
R
S
B
[``no] [```r] [```S] [```b]  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
thermocouple  
Input 2 DIP  
RTD  
RTD (0.1°)  
[``no] [`rtd] [`r†d]  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
RTD  
Input 2 DIP  
4-20mA  
0-20mA  
0-5VÎ  
1-5VÎ  
0-10VÎ(dc)  
[``no] [4-20] [0-20] [`0-5] [`1-5] [0-10]  
1
2
3
O
N
↑
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
process  
[`In2]  
Input 2 continued  
on next pa ge.  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
[`In2]  
If  
↓
Default  
Input 2 continued  
from previous  
pa ge.  
↓
98_ _-3_ _ _-_ _ _ _  
no DIP  
slidewire potentiometer  
[``no] [SLid] [`POt]  
resistance  
only  
[``In2]  
[`In2]  
[`In2]  
98_ _-4_ _ _-_ _ _ _  
no DIP  
current  
[``no] [SLid]  
current  
transformer  
only  
[``In2]  
[`In2]  
98_ _-5_ _ _-_ _ _ _  
no DIP  
event 2  
[``no] [`Ei2]  
digital event  
only  
[``In2]  
[`In2]  
Remote Set Point  
[`rSP]  
Enable a remote set point signal.  
[`rSP] This prompt appears only if the controller is equipped with input 2  
hardware and if [`In2] is not set to [``no] and if [CntL] (in the Global  
Menu) is set to [`nor].  
Default  
↓
[`OFF]  
[`rSP]  
[``On]  
[`rSP]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.10  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Decimal 2  
[dEC2]  
Select the decimal point location for process type input 2 data. This  
prompt, in conjunction with the Range Low and Range High prompts,  
allows you to format and limit units of measure for process 2.  
• All prompts with units of measure related to input 2 will display in the  
selected decimal format.  
• This affects propbands, alarm set points, process set points, calibration  
offsets, deadbands and ranges.  
[dEC2] This prompt appears only if you have set input 2 [`In2] to a  
process input, [Curr] or a thermocouple input set to [0-50] mV.  
Default  
↓
[```)]  
[dEC2]  
[``)0]  
[dEC2]  
[`)00}  
[dEC2]  
[)000]  
[dEC2]  
Range Low 2 and Range High 2  
[`rL2]  
[`rH2]  
Select the low and high limits for input 2. These prompts limit the  
adjustment range for the set points. The default values are the same as  
the limits of the sensor you selected by setting the input 2 DIP switch and  
selecting a value for Input 2 [`In2].  
• Process inputs are scaled by these values. Range high is the value dis-  
played when the maximum process signal is present at the input. Range  
low is the value displayed when the minimum process signal is present  
at the input.  
Example:  
Set [`In2] to [4-20]mA.  
Set [`rL2] to [`100].  
Set [`rH2] to [`500].  
A 4mA input will display [`100].  
A 12mA input will display [`300].  
A 20mA input will display [`500].  
• The low and high values of each sensor type are listed on the specifica-  
tions page of the Appendix.  
[`rL2]  
[`rH2]  
Ra nge Low 2 a nd  
Ra nge High 2  
continued on next  
pa ge.  
• Choose between Fahrenheit and Celsius at the [`C_F] prompt in the  
Global Menu.  
[`rL2] [`rH2] These prompts appear only if the controller is equipped  
with input 2 hardware and with Input 2 [`In2] not set to [``no] or  
[`Ei2].  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Default  
Default  
↓
Default  
Default  
↓
[`rL2]  
[`rH2]  
Ra nge Low 2 a nd  
Ra nge High 2 con-  
tinued from previ-  
ous pa ge.  
↓
↓
[``°F]  
[`rL2] [`rH2]  
[``°C]  
[`rL2] [`rH2]  
[```J]  
[`in2]  
[``32]…[1500]  
[`rL2]  
[```0]…[`816]  
[`rL2]  
98_ _-1_ _-_ _ _ or  
98_ _-2_ _-_ _ _  
[`rH2]  
[`rH2]  
(K)  
[```H]  
[-328]…[2500]  
[-328]…[`750]  
[``32]…[2372]  
[-328]…[1470]  
[``32]…[4200]  
[``32]…[4200]  
[``32]…[2543]  
[-999]…[`999]  
[``32]…[3200]  
[``32]…[3200]  
[``32]…[3300]  
[-328]…[1472]  
[-9(9]…[99(9]  
[-200]…[1371]  
[-200]…[`399]  
[```0]…[1300]  
[-200]…[`799]  
[```0]…[2316]  
[```0]…[2316]  
[```0]…[1395]  
[-573]…[`573]  
[```0]…[1760]  
[```0]…[1760]  
[```0]…[1816]  
[-200]…[`800]  
[-7#3]…[53&7]  
[```t]  
[```n]  
[```E]  
(W5)  
[```C]  
˜
NOTE:  
(W3)  
[```d]  
These values do not  
affect the low or the  
high set point limit  
for process alarms.  
[`Pt2]  
high impedance  
[0-50]  
[```r]  
[```S]  
[```b]  
[`rtd]  
[`r†d]  
98_ _-2_ _-_ _ _ only  
˜
NOTE:  
When high imped-  
ance [0-50]is  
selected for input 1  
the range high for  
both [``°C] and  
[``°F]can be  
[4-20]  
[0-20]  
[`0-5]  
[`1-5]  
[0-10]  
[0-50]  
[0=00]  
[-999]…[9999]  
[-999]…[9999]  
units  
units  
units  
units  
units  
units  
units  
ohms  
amps  
ohms  
extended to [9999].  
The range low when  
[``°C] is selected  
can be extended to  
[-999].  
[-999]…[9999]  
[-999]…[9999]  
[-999]…[9999]  
[-999]…[9999]  
[-999]…[9999]  
[`100]…[1200]  
[```0]…[``50]  
[```0]…[1200]  
slidewire  
[SLid]  
current  
[Curr]  
potentiometer  
[`POt]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.12  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Learn Low  
[LrnL]  
˜
Write the low-end resistance of the slidewire potentiometer to the  
range low 2 parameter.  
[LrnL] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with input 2  
hardware and with Input 2 [`In2] set to [SLid] or [`POt].  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on slidewire feed-  
back.  
Default  
↓
[``no]  
[LrnL]  
[`YES]  
[LrnL]  
Learn High  
[LrnH]  
˜
Write the high-end resistance of the slidewire potentiometer to the  
range low 2 parameter.  
[LrnH] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with input 2  
hardware and with Input 2 [`In2] set to [SLid] or [`POt].  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on slidewire feed-  
back.  
Default  
↓
[``no]  
[LrnH]  
[`YES]  
[LrnH]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Calibration Offset 2  
[CAL2]  
Offset the input 2 signal by a positive or negative value. This allows  
you to compensate for lead resistance, sensor errors or other factors.  
[CAL2] This prompt appears only if the controller is equipped with input 2  
hardware and if [`In2] is not set to [``no] or [`Ei2].  
If  
Minimum  
Default Max. setting/range  
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
(Global Menu)  
↓
[-999] … [```0] … [`999]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[`r†d]  
[`In2]  
[-9(9] … [``)0] … [`9(9]  
&
&
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
(Global Menu)  
(Input Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[-555] … [```0] … [`555]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[`r†d]  
[`In2]  
[-5%5] … [``)0] … [`5%5]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
(Global Menu)  
(Input Menu)  
units  
[-999] … [```0] … [`999]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
[CAL2]  
a process input  
is selected  
RTD Calibration Curve 2  
[rtd2]  
Select the calibration curve for the RTD 2 input. The RTD input uses  
either the European (DIN, 0.003850Ω/Ω/°C) or Japanese (JIS,  
0.003916Ω/Ω/°C) linearization standard.  
[rtd2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with input 2  
hardware and with [`In2] set to [`rtd] or [`r†d].  
Default  
↓
[`din]  
[rtd2]  
[`JIS]  
[rtd2]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.14  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Software Filter 2  
[Ftr2]  
Select the filter time constant, in seconds, for input 2. This smooths a  
rapidly changing input signal for display or control purposes.  
• Select a positive value to filter only the display.  
• Select a negative value to filter the input signal.  
• Set the value to [```0] to disable the filter.  
[Ftr2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with input 2  
hardware and with [`In2] not set to [``no] or [`Ei2].  
Default  
↓
[`-60] … [```0] … [``60]  
[Ftr2]  
[Ftr2]  
[Ftr2]  
Linearization 2  
[Lin2]  
˜
Select square root linearization for input 2.  
[Lin2] This prompt appears only if you have set Input 2 [`In2] to a  
process input or to a thermocouple input set to [0-50] mV.  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on input lineariza-  
tion.  
Default  
↓
[``no]  
[Lin2]  
[root]  
[Lin2]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Hunt  
[Hunt]  
˜
Set the deadband, as a percentage of output, to keep the valve from  
hunting.  
• The slidewire hysteresis [SHYS] setting provides additional control over a  
NOTE:  
valve.  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on slidewire feed-  
back.  
[Hunt] This prompt appears only if the controller is equipped with slidewire  
hardware (98_ _-_3_ _-_ _ _) and with [`In2] set to [SLid].  
Default  
↓
[``)3] … [``!0]… [10)0]  
[Hunt]  
[Hunt]  
[Hunt]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.16  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Input  
Slidewire Hysteresis  
[SHYS]  
˜
Set the inner hysteresis, the point at which the valve output turns  
off.  
• The figure below illustrates the interaction between slidewire hysteresis  
[SHYS] and hunt [Hunt].  
[SHYS] This prompt appears only if the controller is equipped with slidewire  
hardware (98_ _-_3_ _-_ _ _ _) and with Input 2 [`In2] set to [SLid]  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on slidewire feed-  
back.  
Default  
↓
[```0]  
[SHYS]  
[Hunt]  
[SHYS]  
turn-on point (close)  
turn-off point (close)  
turn-off point (open)  
Slidewire  
Hysteresis  
Hunt  
slidewire position  
set point  
Figure 4.17 -  
Hunt and slidewire  
inner hysteresis.  
turn-on point (open)  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[OtPt]  
[`set]  
Setup Prompt  
Output 1  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
Setup-Output  
MODE  
[`Ot1]  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
Output 1
(p. 4.19  
)
[Prc1]  
[HyS1}  
[`Ot2]  
[Prc2]  
Reaching the Output Menu  
*Process 1  
*Hysteresis 1  
*Output 2  
❶ Begin in the Display Loop, and  
press the Up-arrow >and Down-  
arrow <keys simultaneously for  
three seconds to reach the Setup  
Menus.  
*Process 2  
[Hys2]x*Hysteresis 2  
Output 2
(p. 4.21  
)
[Sp2c]  
*Set Point 2 Control  
[`Al2]  
[A25d]  
[LAt2]  
[SIL2]  
[`Ot3]  
[`Al3]  
*Alarm 2  
[OtPt] [gLbL] [COm]  
[`Set]  
[Inpt]  
[`Set]  
[`Set]  
[`Set]  
*Alarm 2 Side  
*Latching 2  
Input  
Menu  
Output  
Menu  
Global Communications  
Menu Menu  
MODE  
p. 4.2  
p. 4.18 p. 4.34 p. 4.44  
p. 4.2  
p. 4.18 p. 4.34 p. 4.44  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
*Silencing 2  
❷ Press the Up-arrow key >to select  
one of the Setup Menus.  
*Output 3  
*Alarm 3  
Output 3
(p. 4.25  
)
[A3sd]  
[Hys3]  
[Lat3]  
[SIL3]  
[`Ot4]  
[`AL4]  
[A4Sd}  
[HyS4]  
[LAt4]  
[SIL4}  
*Alarm 3 Side  
*Hysteresis 3  
*Latching 3  
❸ Press the Mode key µto step  
through the prompts.  
*Silencing 3  
*Output 4  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
[``Ht] [``CL]  
[`Ot1]  
*Alarm 4  
[`Ot1]  
Output 4 (
p
.
4.28)  
*Alarm 4 Side  
*Hysteresis 4  
*Latching 4  
…
…
…
[```3] [`999]  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
[```1]  
[Hys2]  
[```2]  
[Hys2]  
[Hys2]  
[Hys2]  
*Silencing 4  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key >or the  
Down-arrow key <to select one of  
the prompt values.  
[Aout]  
[Prc3}  
[A`rL]  
*Analog Output  
*Process 3  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
Output 3 retransmit  
*Prompts may not appear,  
depending on controller  
configuration.  
(
p. 4.31)  
*Retransmit Low Limit  
*Retransmit High Limit  
*Retransmit Calibration Offset  
[A`rH]  
[ACAL]  
Figure 4.18 -  
Navigating the  
Output Menu.  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.18  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Output Prompts  
˜
NOTE:  
When you are in the Setup menus, the Series 988 displays the menu  
selection ( [InPt], [OtPt], [GLbL] or [COM] ) in the upper display, and  
[`SEt] in the lower display.  
Decimal points may  
not always be in the  
position specified  
below depending  
on the the settings  
in the Decimal 1  
[deC1]and Decimal  
2 [deC2]parame-  
ters in the Input  
Menu.  
The Up-arrow > or Down-arrow key < selects another menu. Press the  
Mode key µ to display the first prompt in the lower display and its value  
in the upper display. Use the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys to  
change the value in the upper display. The new value will not take effect  
until after a five-second delay or until you press the Mode key µ.  
Output 1  
[`Ot1]  
Set the way that output 1 will respond to a difference between the set  
point and an input variable.  
• [``Ht] select reverse action, so that output 1 responds when the input  
signal is less than the setpoint.  
• [``CL] select direct action, so that output 1 responds when the input  
signal is more than the setpoint.  
[`Ot1] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[``Ht]  
[`Ot1]  
[``CL]  
[`Ot1]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Process 1  
[Prc1]  
Select the process range for output 1.  
[Prc1] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 1  
process hardware (98_ _-_ _F_-_ _ _ _).  
Default  
↓
4-20mA  
0-20mA  
0-5VÎ  
1-5VÎ  
0-10VÎ(dc)  
[4-20] [0-20] [`0-5] [`1-5] [0-10]  
[Prc1]  
[Prc1]  
[Prc1]  
[Prc1]  
[Prc1]  
Hysteresis 1  
[HYS1]  
Select the switching hysteresis for output 1. This determines the  
change in temperature or process units needed to turn the output from  
full on to full off.  
[HYS1] This prompt does not appear on controllers equipped with output 1  
process hardware (98_ _-_ _F_-_ _ _ _). This prompt only appears with the  
controller set up as an on/off controller ( [PBIA] = [```0] ).  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[```1] … [```3]… [`999]  
[HYS1  
][HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
& [`r†d]  
[`In1]  
[``)1] … [``#0]… [`9(9]  
[HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
(Global Menu)  
(Input Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[```1] … [```2]… [`555]  
[HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
& [`r†d]  
[`In1]  
[``)1] … [``@0]… [`5%5]  
[HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
(Global Menu)  
(Input Menu)  
[```1] … [```3]… [`999] units  
[HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
[HYS1]  
a
process input  
is selected  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.20  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Output 2  
[`Ot2]  
Set the way that output 2 will respond to a difference between the set  
point and an input variable.  
• [`AL2] de-energizes output 2 in an alarm condition.  
• [AL2n] energizes output 2 in an alarm condition.  
• [``Ht] select reverse action, so that output 2 responds when the input  
signal is less than the set point.  
• [``CL] select direct action, so that output 2 responds when the input  
signal is more than the set point.  
[`Ot2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 2  
hardware (not 98_ _-_ _ _A-_ _ _ _). [`AL2] and [AL2n] do not appear if out-  
put 2 is a process output (98_ _-_ _ _F-_ _ _ _). [``Ht] and [``CL] do not  
appear if [AL90] (in the Global Menu) is set to [dUPL].  
Default  
↓
[``no] [`AL2] [Al2n] [``Ht] [``CL]  
[`Ot2]  
[`Ot2]  
[`Ot2]  
[`Ot2]  
[`Ot2]  
Process 2  
[Prc2]  
Select the process range for output 2.  
[Prc2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 2  
process hardware (98_ _-_ _ _F-_ _ _ _) and with [`Ot2] not set to [``no].  
Default  
↓
4-20mA  
0-20mA  
0-5VÎ  
1-5VÎ  
[4-20] [0-20] [`0-5] [`1-5] [0-10]  
0-10VÎ(dc)  
[Prc2]  
[Prc2]  
[Prc2]  
[Prc2]  
[Prc2]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Hysteresis 2  
[HYS2]  
Select the switching hysteresis for output 2. This determines the  
change in temperature or process units needed to turn the output from off  
to on.  
• If [`AL2] is set to [rAtE] settings for [HYS2] will be in degrees per  
minute or units per minute.  
• If the input referenced by [`AL2] is set to [`r†d] the range is affected as  
listed below.  
[HYS2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 2  
hardware and with the controller set up as an on/off controller ([Pb2A} =  
[```0]), and with [`Ot2] not set to [``no]. This prompt does not appear  
on controllers equipped with output 2 process hardware, ([`In2} = [sLid],  
or if [ALg0} in the Global menu = [dUPL]).  
If  
↓
Default  
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[```1] … [```3] … [`999]  
[HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
& [`r†d]  
Input 1 or 2  
[``)1] … [``#0] … [`9(9]  
[HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
(Global Menu) (see note above)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[```1] … [```2] … [`555]  
[HYS2][  
HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
& [`r†d]  
Input 1 or 2  
[``)1] … [``@0] … [`5%5]  
[HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
(Global Menu) (see note above)  
[```1] … [```3] … [`999]units  
[HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
[HYS2]  
a process input  
is selected  
Set Point 2 Control  
[SP2c]  
Select a second set point.  
• [``Pr] enables a set point independent from the Set Point 1 [`SP1]  
value.  
• [``dE] enables a set point at a deviation from the Set Point 1 [`SP1]  
value.  
[Prc1] This prompt appears only if output 2 hardware is present and is  
equal to the output 1 setting.  
Default  
↓
[``Pr]  
[SPc2]  
[``dE]  
[SPc2]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.22  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Alarm 2  
[`AL2]  
˜
Select the alarm type for alarm 2. Select the trigger points for the alarm  
with the [A2LO] and [A2HI] settings in the System Menu [`SYS].  
• [`Pr1] uses the process signal from input 1. Changing the set point  
does not change the alarm response.  
• [`dE1] uses a deviation from the input 1 signal. Changing the set point  
changes the alarm response.  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
• [`Pr2] uses the process signal from input 2. This choice does not appear  
if the controller is not equipped with input 2 hardware or if [`In2] is set  
to [``no] or [`Ei2].  
• [`dE2] uses a deviation from the input 2 signal. This prompt does not  
appear if the controller is not equipped with input 2 hardware or if  
[`In2] is set to [``no] or [`Ei2].  
• [rAtE] uses the rate of change at input 1 in degrees per minute.  
[`AL2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 2  
hardware and with [`Ot2] set to [`AL2] or [AL2n].  
Default  
↓
[`Pr1] [`de1] [`Pr2] [`de2] [rAtE] [``no]  
[`AL2] [`AL2]  
[`AL2] [`AL2] [`AL2] [`AL2]  
Alarm 2 Side  
[A2Sd]  
Select what triggers alarm 2.  
• [both] triggers an alarm when the signal ≤ [A2LO] or ≥ [A2HI].  
• [HigH] triggers an alarm when the signal ≥ [A2HI].  
• [LoW] triggers an alarm when the signal ≤ [A2LO].  
[A2Sd] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 2  
hardware and with [`Ot2] set to [`AL2] or [AL2n].  
Default  
↓
[both] [HigH] [Low]  
[A2Sd]  
[A2Sd]  
[A2Sd]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Latching 2  
[LAt2]  
Select whether alarm 2 will be latching or non-latching. A latching  
alarm [`LAt] must be turned off manually. A non-latching alarm [`nLA]  
turns off when an alarm condition no longer exists.  
[LAt2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 2  
hardware and with [`Ot2] set to [`AL2] or [AL2n].  
˜
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
Default  
↓
[`nLA]  
[LAt2]  
[`LAt]  
[LAt2]  
Silencing 2  
[SIL2]  
Select silencing to inhibit alarm 2 on startup and to allow the opera-  
tor to reset the alarm output, not the visual display.  
• Silencing disables the alarm until the signal is between [A2LO] and  
[A2HI].  
[`AL2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 2  
hardware and with [`Ot2] set to [`AL2] or [AL2n].  
Default  
↓
[`OFF]  
[SIL2]  
[``On]  
[SIL2]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.24  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Output 3  
[`Ot3]  
˜
Select the alarm condition for output 3.  
• [`AL3] de-energizes output 3 in an alarm condition.  
• [AL3n] energizes output 3 in an alarm condition.  
[`Ot3] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 3  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-B_ _ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-J_ _ _ or  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-K_ _ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-C_ _ _).  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
Default  
↓
[`AL3]  
[`Ot3]  
[AL3n]  
[`Ot3]  
[``no]  
[`Ot3]  
Alarm 3  
[`AL3]  
Select the alarm type for alarm 3.  
• [`Pr1] uses the process signal from input 1.  
• [`dE1] uses a deviation from the input 1 signal.  
• [`Pr2] uses the process signal from input 2. This prompt does not  
appear if the controller is not equipped with input 2 hardware or if  
[`In2] is set to [``no] or [`Ei2].  
• [`dE2] uses a deviation from the input 2 signal. This prompt does not  
appear if the controller is not equipped with input 2 hardware or if  
[`In2] is set to [``no] or [`Ei2].  
• [rAtE] uses the rate of change at input 1 in degrees per minute.  
[`AL3] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 3  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-B_ _ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-J_ _ _ or  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-K_ _ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-C_ _ _), and with [`Ot3]  
set to [`AL3] or [AL3n].  
Default  
↓
[`Pr1]  
[`AL3]  
[`de1]  
[`AL3]  
[`Pr2]  
[`AL3]  
[`de2]  
[`AL3]  
[rAtE]  
[`AL3]  
[``no]  
[`AL3]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Alarm 3 Side  
[A3Sd]  
˜
Select what triggers alarm 3.  
• [both] triggers an alarm when the signal ≤ [A3LO] or ≥ [A3HI].  
• [HiGH] triggers an alarm when the signal ≥ [A3HI].  
• [LOW] triggers an alarm when the signal ≤ [A3LO].  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
[A3Sd] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 3  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-B_ _ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-J_ _ _ or  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-K_ _ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-C_ _ _) and with [`Ot3]  
set to [`AL3] or [AL3n].  
Default  
↓
[both]  
[A3Sd]  
[HiGH]  
[A3Sd]  
[LOW]  
[A3Sd]  
[HYS3]  
Hysteresis 3  
Select the switching hysteresis for alarm 3. This determines the change  
in temperature or process units needed to turn the output from off to on.  
• If [`AL3] is set to [rAtE] settings for [HYS3] will be in degrees per  
minute or units per minute.  
• If the input referenced by [`AL3] is set to [`r†d] the range is affected as  
listed below.  
[HYS3] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 3  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-B_ _ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-J_ _ _ or  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-K_ _ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-C_ _ _).  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[```1]… [```3] …[`999]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
(Global Menu)  
&
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[`r†d]  
Input 1 or 2  
[``)1]… [``#0] …[`9(9]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
(Global Menu) (see note above)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[```1]… [```2] …[`555]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
(Global Menu)  
&
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[`r†d]  
Input 1 or 2  
[``)1]… [``@0] …[`5%5]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
(Global Menu) (see note above)  
units  
[```1]… [```3] …[`999]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
[HYS3]  
a process input  
is selected  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.26  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Latching 3  
[LAt3]  
˜
Select whether alarm 3 will be latching or non-latching. A latching  
alarm [`LAt] must be turned off manually. A non-latching alarm [`nLA]  
turns off when an alarm condition no longer exists.  
[LAt3] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 3  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-B_ _ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-J_ _ _ or  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-K_ _ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-C_ _ _) and with [`Ot3] set  
to [`AL3] or [AL3n].  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
Default  
↓
[`nLA]  
[LAt3]  
[`LAt]  
[LAt3]  
[SIL3]  
˜
Silencing 3  
Select silencing to inhibit alarm 3 on startup and to allow the opera-  
tor to reset the alarm output, not the visual display.  
• Silencing disables the alarm until the signal is between [A3LO] and  
[A3HI].  
NOTE:  
[SIL3] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 3  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-B_ _ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-J_ _ _ or  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-K_ _ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-C_ _ _) and with [`Ot3] set  
to [`AL3] or [AL3n].  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
Default  
↓
[`OFF]  
[SIL3]  
[``On]  
[SIL3]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
[`Ot4]  
˜
Output 4  
Select the alarm condition for output 4.  
• [`AL4] de-energizes output 4 in an alarm condition.  
• [AL4n] energizes output 4 in an alarm condition.  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
[`Ot4] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 4  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_B_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_D_ _ ,  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-_E_ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_K_ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_C_ _).  
Default  
↓
[`AL4]  
[`Ot4]  
[AL4n]  
[`Ot4]  
Alarm 4  
[`AL4]  
Select the alarm type for alarm 4.  
• [`Pr1] uses a process signal from input 1.  
• [`dE1] uses a deviation from the input 1 signal.  
• [`Pr2] uses the process signal from input 2. This prompt does not  
appear if the controller is not equipped with input 2 hardware or if  
[`In2] is set to [``no] or [`Ei2].  
• [`dE2] uses a deviation from the input 2 signal. This prompt does not  
appear if the controller is not equipped with input 2 hardware or if  
[`In2] is set to [``no] or [`Ei2].  
• [rAtE] uses the rate of change at input 1 in degrees per minute.  
[`AL4] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 4  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_B_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_D_ _ ,  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-_E_ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_K_ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_C_ _).  
Default  
↓
[`Pr1]  
[`AL4]  
[`dE1]  
[`AL4]  
[`Pr2]  
[`AL4]  
[`dE2]  
[`AL4]  
[rAtE]  
[`AL4]  
[``no]  
[`AL4]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.28  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Alarm 4 Side  
[A4Sd]  
˜
Select what triggers alarm 4.  
• [both] triggers an alarm when the signal ≤ [A4LO] or ≥ [A4HI].  
• [HiGH] triggers an alarm when the signal ≥ [A4HI].  
• [LOW] triggers an alarm when the signal ≤ [A4LO].  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
[A4Sd] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 4  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_B_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_D_ _ ,  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-_E_ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_K_ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_C_ _)  
and with [`Ot4] set to [`AL4] or [AL4n].  
Default  
↓
[BOTH]  
[A4SD]  
[HIGH]  
[A4SD]  
[LOW]  
[A4SD]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.29  
Setup-Output  
Hysteresis 4  
[HYS4]  
Select the switching hysteresis for alarm 4. This determines the change  
in temperature or process units needed to turn the output from off to on.  
• If [`AL4] is set to [rAtE] settings for [HYS4] will be in degrees per  
minute or units per minute.  
• If the input referenced by [`AL4] is set to [`r†d] the range is affected as  
listed below.  
[HYS4] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 4  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_B_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_D_ _ ,  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-_E_ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_K_ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_C_ _).  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[```1] … [```3] … [`999]  
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[`r†d]  
Input 1 or 2  
[``)1] … [``#0] … [`9(9]  
&
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
(Global Menu) (see note above)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[```1] … [```2] … [`555]  
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[`r†d]  
Input 1 or 2  
[``)1] … [``@0] … [`5%5]  
&
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
(Global Menu) (see note above)  
[```1] … [```3] … [`999] units  
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
[HYS4]  
a process input  
is selected  
[LAt4]  
˜
Latching 4  
Select whether alarm 4 will be latching or non-latching. A latching  
alarm [`LAT] must be turned off manually. A non-latching alarm [`nLA]  
turns off when an alarm condition no longer exists.  
[LAt4] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 4  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_B_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_J_ _ or  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-_K_ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_C_ _). and with [`Ot4] set  
to [`AL4] or [AL4n].  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
Default  
↓
[`nLA]  
[LAt4]  
[`LAt]  
[LAt4]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.30  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Silencing 4  
[SIL4]  
˜
Select silencing to inhibit alarm 4 on startup and to allow the opera-  
tor to reset the alarm output, not the visual display.  
• Silencing disables the alarm until the signal is between [A4LO] and  
[A4HI].  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 7 for  
more information  
on alarms.  
[SIL4] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with output 4  
hardware for a relay (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_B_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_D_ _ ,  
98_ _-_ _ _ _-_E_ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_K_ _) or switched dc (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_C_ _)  
and with [`Ot4] set to [`AL4] or [AL4n].  
Default  
↓
[`OFF]  
[SIL4]  
[``On]  
[SIL4]  
Analog Output  
[Aout]  
˜
Select which value to retransmit as the output 3 signal.  
• [Prc1] retransmits the process 1 value.  
• [StPt] retransmits the set point.  
NOTE:  
• [Prc2] retransmits the process 2 value. This prompt appears only if the  
controller is equipped with input 2 hardware and if [`In2] is not set to  
[``no] or [`Ei2].  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on retransmit.  
• [``no] turns off retransmit function.  
[Aout] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with retransmit  
hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-M_ _ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-N_ _ _).  
Default  
↓
[Prc1]  
[Aout]  
[StPt]  
[Aout]  
[Prc2]  
[Aout]  
[``no]  
[Aout]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Process 3  
[Prc3]  
Select the range for the retransmit signal at output 3.  
[Prc3] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with retransmit  
hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-M_ _ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-N_ _ _) and with [Aout] not  
set to [``no].  
Default  
↓
4-20mA  
0-20mA  
0-5VÎ  
1-5VÎ 0-10VÎ(dc)  
[4-20] [0-20] [`0-5] [`1-5] [0-10]  
[Prc3]  
[Prc3]  
[Prc3]  
[Prc3]  
[Prc3]  
Retransmit Low Limit  
[A`rL]  
˜
Select the low limit for the retransmit signal at output 3.  
• The default value is equal to [`rL1] or [`rL2] (in the Input Menu)  
depending on whether [Aout] is set to [Prc1] or [Prc2].  
NOTE:  
• The decimal precision of [A`rL] is determined by [dEC1] (Input Menu) if  
[Aout] is set to [Prc1] or [StPt]; it is determined by [dEC2] if [Aout] is  
set to [Prc2].  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on retransmit.  
[A`rL] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with retransmit  
hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-M_ _ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-N_ _ _) and with [Aout] not  
set to [``no].  
[-999] … [A`rH]  
[A`rL]  
[A`rL]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.32  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Output  
Retransmit High Limit  
[A`rH]  
Select the high limit for the retransmit signal at output 3.  
• The default value is equal to [`rH1] or [`rH2] (in the Input Menu)  
depending on whether [Aout] is set to [Prc1] or [Prc2].  
• The decimal precision of [ACAL] is determined by [dEC1] (Input Menu) if  
[Aout] is set to [Prc1] or [StPt]; it is determined by [dEC2] if [Aout] is  
set to [Prc2].  
[A`rH] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with retransmit  
hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-M_ _ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-N_ _ _) and with [Aout] not  
set to [``no].  
[A`rL] … [9999]  
[A`rH]  
[A`rH]  
Retransmit Calibration Offset  
[ACAL]  
˜
Select an offset value for the retransmit signal at output 3.  
• The decimal precision of [ACAL] is determined by [dEC1] (Input Menu) if  
[Aout] is set to [Prc1] or [StPt]; it is determined by [dEC2] if [Aout] is  
set to [Prc2].  
NOTE:  
See Chapter 8 for  
more information  
on retransmit.  
[ACAL] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with retransmit  
hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-M_ _ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-N_ _ _) and with [Aout] not  
set to [``no].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[-999] … [```0] … [`999]  
[ACAL]  
[ACAL]  
[ACAL]  
(Global Menu)  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[-555] … [```0] … [`555]  
[ACAL]  
[ACAL]  
[ACAL]  
(Global Menu)  
[-999] … [```0] … [`999]units  
a process input  
is selected  
[ACAL]  
[ACAL]  
[ACAL]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Reaching the Global Menu  
[GlbL]  
[`Set]  
Setup prompt  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
MODE  
[`C_F]  
[FaIL]  
[`Err]  
[CntL]  
[CSAC]  
[ALGO]  
[Pid2]  
[Proc]  
[StPt]  
[`EiI]  
[`Ei2]  
[Anun]  
[`LoP]  
[`HiP]  
[AtSp]  
[``rP]  
[Rate]  
*Celsius-Fahrenheit  
Failure Mode  
❶ Begin in the Display Loop, and  
press the Up-arrow > and Down-  
arrow < keys simultaneously for  
three seconds to reach the Setup  
Menus.  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
Error Latching  
*Control Type  
*Cascade Action  
*Algorithm  
[OtPt] [gLbL] [COm]  
[`Set]  
[Inpt]  
[`Set]  
[`Set]  
[`Set]  
Input  
Menu  
Output  
Menu  
Global Communications  
Menu Menu  
*PID 2 Crossover Selection  
*Crossover Process Value  
*Crossover Set Point Value  
Event Input 1  
p. 4.2  
p. 4.18 p. 4.34 p. 4.44  
(p. 4.38  
)
PID
❷ Press the Up-arrow key > to select  
one of the Setup Menus.  
MODE  
(p. 4.40  
)
Event Input
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
*Event Input 2  
❸ Press the Mode key µ to step  
through the prompts.  
Annunciator  
Low Power Limit  
High Power Limit  
Auto-tune Set Point  
*Ramping Function  
*Ramp Rate  
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
…
…
(
p. 4.43)  
Ramping
…
[```1] [```2] [9999]  
[```0]  
[rate]  
[rate]  
[rate]  
[rate]  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key > or the  
Down-arrow key < to select one of  
the prompt values.  
*Prompts may not appear, depending  
on controller configuration.  
Figure 4.34 -  
Navigating the  
Global Menu.  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.34  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Global Prompts  
˜
NOTE:  
When you are in the Setup menus, the Series 988 displays the menu  
selection ([InPt], [OtPt], [GLbL] or [COM]) in the upper display, and  
[`SEt] in the lower display.  
Decimal points may  
not always be in the  
position specified  
below depending on  
the the settings in  
the Decimal 1  
[dEC1]and Decimal  
2 [dEC2] parame-  
ters in the Input  
Menu.  
The Up-arrow > or Down-arrow key < selects another menu. Press  
the Mode key µ to display the first prompt in the lower display and its  
value in the upper display. Use the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow <  
keys to change the value in the upper display. The new value will not take  
effect until after a five-second delay or until you press the Mode key µ.  
Celsius-Fahrenheit  
[`C_F]  
[FAIL]  
Select which temperature scale the controller will use.  
[`C_F] This prompt appears only on controllers with either Input 1 or  
Input 2 set to something other than a process input.  
Default  
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
Failure Mode  
Select the output level that the controller will maintain if an input  
fails.  
• Bumpless transfer [bPLS] maintains the same output settings after an  
input failure.  
[FAIL] This prompt always appears.  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
[bPLS]  
[FAIL]  
%
%
%
[-100] … [`100]  
a heat/cool  
application  
[FAIL]  
[FAIL]  
[bPLS]  
[FAIL]  
[```0] … [`100]  
a heat-only  
application  
[FAIL]  
[FAIL]  
[bPLS]  
[FAIL]  
[-100] … [```0]  
a cool-only  
application  
[FAIL]  
[FAIL]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Error Latching  
[`Err]  
Select whether errors will be latching or non-latching.  
• Non-latching alarms [`nLA] turn off when there is no alarm condition.  
• Latching alarms [`LAt] must be turned off manually.  
[`Err] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[`nLA]  
[`Err]  
[`LAt]  
[`Err]  
Control Type  
[CntL]  
Select a control method: normal [`nor]; cascade [CSCd]; ratio [rAti];  
or differential [diFF].  
[CntL] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with enhanced  
software (98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _) and input 2 hardware for a basic thermocou-  
ple signal conditioner (98_ _-_1_ _-_ _ _ _) or a universal signal conditioner  
(98_ _-_2_ _-_ _ _ _) and with [`rSP] set to [`OFF].  
Default  
↓
[`nor]  
[CntL]  
[CSCd]  
[CntL]  
[rAti]  
[CntL]  
[diFF]  
[CntL]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.36  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Cascade Action  
[CSAC]  
Select the control action between the inner and outer loop of a cas-  
cade system.  
• Direct action [`dir] makes the percent output from the outer loop  
directly proportional to the set point of the inner loop (input 2). A 100%  
signal in the outer loop will set the inner loop to range high 2 [`rH2]  
(Input Menu). A 0% signal in the outer loop will set the inner loop to  
range low 2 [`rL2] (Input Menu).  
• Reverse action [`rEU] makes the percent output from the outer loop  
inversely proportional to the set point of the inner loop (input 2). A 100%  
signal in the outer loop will set the inner loop to range low 2 [`rL2]  
(Input Menu). A 0% signal in the outer loop will set the inner loop to  
range high 2 [`rH2] (Input Menu).  
[CSAC] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with enhanced  
software (98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _) and with [CntL] set to [CSCd].  
Default  
↓
[`dir]  
[CASC]  
[`rEU]  
[CASC]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Algorithm  
[ALGO]  
Select the control algorithm.  
• [`Pid] selects one set of PID prompts.  
• [`Pdr] selects proportional/derivative control with manual reset in per-  
cent power.  
• [Pid2] selects two complete sets of PID prompts. This selection does not  
appear if [CntL] is set to [CSCd].  
• [dUPL] selects duplex (heating and cooling) control. This prompt does  
not appear unless output 1 is a process output.  
[ALGO] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with enhanced  
software (98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _).  
Default  
↓
[`Pid]  
[ALGO]  
[`Pdr]  
[ALGO]  
[Pid2]  
[ALGO]  
[dUPL]  
[ALGO]  
PID 2 Crossover Selection  
Select which parameter determines the crossover from PID A to PID  
B: process [Proc]; set point [StPt]; or none [``no].  
[Pid2]  
[Pid2] This prompt appears only on controllers with [ALGO] set to [Pid2].  
Default  
↓
[Proc]  
[Pid2]  
[StPt]  
[Pid2]  
[``no]  
[Pid2]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.38  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Crossover Process Value  
[Proc]  
Select the process value at which the control algorithm will crossover  
between PID A and PID B. PID A is active below this value and PID B is  
active above this value.  
• This value cannot be set lower than range low 1 [`rL1] or higher than  
range high 1 [`rH1].  
[Proc] This prompt appears only on controllers with [Pid2] set to [Proc].  
Default  
↓
[`rL1]  
[Proc]  
[`rH1]  
[Proc]  
Crossover Set Point Value  
[StPt]  
Select the set point value at which the control algorithm will  
crossover between PID A and PID B. PID A is active below this value and  
PID B is active above this value.  
• This value cannot be set lower than range low 1 [`rL1] or higher than  
range high 1 [`rH1].  
[StPt] This prompt appears only on controllers with [Pid2] set to [StPt].  
Default  
↓
[`rL1]  
[StPt]  
[`rH1]  
[StPt]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Event Input 1  
[`Ei1]  
Select the effect of closing the event input 1 switch.  
• [``no] disables event input 1.  
• [`LOC] locks out the front panel keys.  
• [`ALr] resets an alarm.  
• [A-M] switches the controller to manual mode at the power level set at  
[FAIL] (Global Menu) and disables the Auto/Man key.  
• [`OFF] turns all control outputs off (de-energize relays).  
• [`Pid] switches from PID A to PID B.  
• [Actn] selects the opposite control action for output 1 and 2.  
• [`rSP] switches to a remote set point.  
• [IdSP] switches to an idle or second set point.  
[`Ei1] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[``no] [`LOC] [`ALr] [A-M] [`OFF] [`Pid] [Actn] [`rsp] [IdSP]  
[`Ei1]  
[`Ei1] [`Ei1]  
[`Ei1]  
[`Ei1] [`Ei1] [`Ei1] [`Ei1] [`Ei1]  
[`Ei2]  
Event Input 2  
Select the effect of closing the event input 2 switch. The selections are  
the same as for event input 1.  
[`Ei2] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with hardware  
for a second event input (98_ _-_5_ _-_ _ _ _) and with [`In2] set to  
[`Ei2].  
Default  
↓
[``no] [`LOC][`ALr] [A-M] [`OFF] [`Pid] [Actn] [IdSP]  
[`Ei2] [`Ei2] [`Ei2] [`Ei2] [`Ei2]  
[`Ei2]  
[`Ei2]  
[`Ei2]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.40  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Annunciator  
[Anun]  
[`LoP]  
Select whether alarm messages will flash in the lower display.  
[Anun] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[``on]  
[Anun]  
[`OFF]  
[Anun]  
Low Power Limit  
Select the low limit for the percent output. For cooling (direct acting)  
enter a negative number.  
[`LoP] This prompt always appears.  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
[-100]%… [`Hip]  
a heat/cool  
application  
[`LoP]  
[`LoP]  
[```0]%… [`Hip]  
a heat only  
application  
[`LoP]  
[`LoP]  
[-100]%… [`Hip]  
a cool only  
application  
[`LoP]  
[`LoP]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
High Power Limit  
[`HiP]  
Select the high limit for the percent output. For cooling (direct acting)  
enter a negative number.  
[`HiP] This prompt always appears.  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
%
%
%
[`LoP] … [`100]  
a heat/cool  
application  
[`HiP]  
[`HiP]  
[`LoP] … [`100]  
a heat only  
application  
[`HiP]  
[`HiP]  
[`LoP] … [```0]  
a cool only  
application  
[`HiP]  
[`HiP]  
Auto-tune Set Point  
[AtSP]  
Select the percentage at which the controller will auto tune the cur-  
rent control set point.  
[AtSP] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[``50] … [``90] … [`150] %  
[AtSP]  
[AtSP]  
[AtSP]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.42  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Global  
Ramping Function  
[``rP]  
[rAtE]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
Select when the controller will ramp. Ramping limits the speed at  
which an element can heat up. Ramping is often used to protect parts that  
would crack or warp if they heat up too quickly.  
• [`OFF] sets the system to heat as quickly as possible.  
• [Strt] sets the system to ramp only at startup.  
• [StPt] sets the system to ramp at startup and whenever the set point  
changes.  
[``rP] This prompt appears only on controllers with [`rSP] (Input Menu)  
set to [`OFF] and with [`Ei1] not set to [`rSP] and with [CntL] (Global  
Menu) not set to [diff] or [rati].  
Default  
↓
[`OFF]  
[``rP]  
[Strt]  
[``rP]  
[StPt]  
[``rP]  
Ramp Rate  
Select the ramping rate in degrees per minute.  
[rAtE] This prompt appears only on controllers with [``rP] set to [Strt]  
or [StPt].  
Default  
↓
[``90] … [`100] … [9999] °/min.  
[rAtE]  
][rAtE]  
[rAtE]  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Comm  
Reaching the Communications Menu  
❶ Begin in the Display Loop, and  
press the Up-arrow >and Down-  
arrow <keys simultaneously for  
three seconds to reach the Setup  
Menus.  
[COm]  
[`Set]  
Setup Prompt  
Baud Rate  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
MODE  
[BaUd]  
[Data]  
[Prot]  
[addr]  
[IntF]  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
Data Bits and Parity  
Protocol Type  
*Address  
[OtPt] [gLbL] [COm]  
[`Set]  
[Inpt]  
[`Set]  
[`Set]  
[`Set]  
Input  
Menu  
Output  
Menu  
Global Communications  
Menu Menu  
*Interface Type  
p. 4.2  
p. 4.18 p. 4.34 p. 4.44  
❷ Press the Up-arrow key >to select  
one of the Setup Menus.  
*Prompts may not  
appear, depending  
on controller config-  
uration.  
❸ Press the Mode key µto step  
through the prompts.  
˜
…
…
NOTE:  
The Communications Menu  
appears only on controllers  
equipped with communications  
hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_R_ _,  
98 _ _-_ _ _ _-_U_ _ or 98_ _-_ _  
_ _-_S_ _).  
…
[9600]  
[baUD]  
[1200] [4800]  
[baUD]  
[baUD]  
[`300]  
[baUD]  
See Data Communications with  
the Series 988 Family of  
Controllers for detailed informa-  
tion on communications.  
[`485] [`422]  
[Intf]  
[Intf]  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key >or the  
Down-arrow key <to select one of  
the prompt values.  
Figure 4.44 -  
Navigating the  
Communications Menu.  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.44  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Comm  
Communications Prompts  
When you are in the Setup menus, the Series 988 displays the menu  
selection ( [InPt], [OtPt], [GLbL] or [COM] ) in the upper display, and  
[`SEt] in the lower display.  
The Up-arrow > or Down-arrow key < selects another menu. Press the  
Mode key µ to display the first prompt in the lower display and its value  
in the upper display. Use the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys to  
change the value in the upper display. The new value will not take effect  
until after a five-second delay or until you press the Mode key µ.  
Baud Rate  
[bAUd]  
[dAtA]  
Select the communications speed.  
[bAUd] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with communi-  
cations hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_R_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_U_ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-  
_S_ _).  
Default  
↓
[9600]  
[bAUd]  
[`300]  
[bAUd]  
[`600]  
[bAUd]  
[1200]  
[bAUd]  
[2400]  
[bAUd]  
[4800]  
[bAUd]  
Data Bits and Parity  
Select the communications format (start bit = 1, stop bit = 1).  
• Setting [Prot] to [Mod] automatically sets [dAtA] to [``8n].  
[dAtA] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with communi-  
cations hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_R_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_U_ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-  
_S_ _).  
Default  
↓
[``7o]  
[dAtA]  
[``7E]  
[dAtA]  
[``8n]  
[dAtA]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Comm  
Protocol Type  
[Prot]  
Select the communications protocol.  
• [FULL] selects ANSI X3.28 2.2 - A.3.  
• [``on] selects Xon/Xoff.  
• [Mod] selects Modbus  
[Prot] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with communi-  
cations hardware (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_R_ _, 98_ _-_ _ _ _-_U_ _ or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-  
_S_ _).  
Default  
↓
[FULL]  
[Prot]  
[``On]  
[Prot]  
[mod]  
[Prot]  
Address  
[Addr]  
Select an address for the controller. The computer will use this address  
when communicating with this controller.  
[Addr] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with communica-  
tions hardware for EIA/TIA-485 and EIA/TIA-422.  
If  
Default  
↓
[`485]  
[IntF]  
↓
[```0]… [``31]  
[Addr]  
[Addr]  
[`422]  
[Intf]  
[```0]… [```9]  
[Addr]  
[Addr]  
[Mod]  
[Intf]  
[```0]…[```1]… [`247]  
[Addr]  
[Addr]  
[Addr]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
4.46  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup-Comm  
Interface Type  
[IntF]  
Select the interface type for Output 4, Option S.  
• [`485] selects EIA/TIA-485.  
• [`422] selects EIA/TIA-422.  
[IntF] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with communications  
hardware for EIA/TIA-485 and EIA/TIA-422 (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_S_ _).  
Default  
↓
[`485]  
[IntF]  
[`422]  
[IntF]  
Interface Type  
[IntF]  
Select the interface type for Output 4, Option U.  
• [`485] selects EIA/TIA-485.  
• [`232] selects EIA/TIA-232.  
[IntF] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with communications  
hardware for EIA/TIA-485 and EIA/TIA-232 (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_U_ _).  
Default  
↓
[`232]  
[IntF]  
[`485]  
[IntF]  
Setup Menus, Chapter 4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
4.47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 The Operation Menus  
Navigating the Operation Menus  
To reach the Operation Menus, begin in the Display Loop and press the  
Mode key µ. Depending on the controller configuration, either the Set  
Point 2 prompt [`SP2], the Idle Set Point prompt [IdSP] or the Operation  
Menu prompt [OPEr] will appear in the lower display. The three Operation  
Menus are: System [`SYS]; PID A [PidA]; and PID B [Pidb]. Use the  
Mode key µ to step past the Set Point 2 prompt [`SP2] or the Idle Set  
Point prompt [IdSP], if they appear (see prompt information). Upon reach-  
ing the Operation Menu prompt [OPEr] use the Up-arrow > or Down-  
arrow < key to select a menu and the Mode key µ to step through a  
menu.  
˜
NOTE:  
Press the Display  
key ∂ to return to  
the Display Loop  
from any point in  
any menu.  
You will not see every prompt in any of these menus. The unit’s configura-  
tion and model number determine which prompts appear. After stepping  
through each menu, the Series 988 returns to the Operation Menu prompt  
[OPEr]. Use the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys to select the next  
menu, or use the Mode key µ to advance through the same menu again.  
To move backwards through the menu hold the Mode key µ down and  
press the Up-arrow key >. Use the Up-arrow > or Down-arrow <  
key to change the prompt setting.  
W
ATL  
W
❶ Begin in the Display Loop, and press the Mode key  
µ to reach the Set Point 2 prompt [`SP2], the Idle  
Set Point prompt [IdSP] or the Operation Menu  
[OPEr].  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
M
SERIES 988  
[`988]  
[`SP2]  
Set Point 2  
MODE  
[`988]  
[IdSP] Idle Set Point  
MODE  
[`SyS]  
[OPEr]  
[PIDA]  
[OPEr]  
[PIdb]  
[OPEr]  
System  
Menu  
PID A  
Menu  
PID B  
Menu  
p. 5.2  
p. 5.9  
p. 5.9  
W
ATL  
W
❷ Use the Mode key µ to step past the Set Point 2  
prompt [`SP2] or the Idle Set Point prompt [IdSP], if  
they appear (see prompt information). Upon reaching  
the Operation Menu prompt [OPEr] use the Up-arrow  
> key to select a menu.  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
Figure 5.1 -  
MODE  
Navigating the  
Operation Menus.  
SERIES 988  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
5.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-System  
Reaching the System Menu  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
[`SP2] *Set Point 2  
Set Points (p.5.3
)
MODE  
[IdSP]  
*Idle Set Point  
MODE  
MODE  
[`SyS]  
[`SP2]  
Operation Prompt  
WATL  
W
PROCESS  
[Ei1S]  
*Event Input 1 Status  
(p. 5.4  
)
Event Input
L1 L2 L3 L4  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
[Ei2S]  
*Event Input 2 Status  
M
SERIES 988  
[A2LO]  
*Alarm 2 Low  
[A2HI]  
*Alarm 2 High  
❸ Select the System Menu, then  
press the Mode key µ to step  
through the prompts.  
[A3LO]  
MODE  
*Alarm 3 Low  
(p. 5.4  
)
Alarms
[A3HI]  
*Alarm 3 High  
[A4LO]  
*Alarm 4 Low  
[A4HI]  
*Alarm 4 High  
…
…
[`AUT]  
*Auto-tune  
[-999] [-998] [-997]  
[A2LO]  
…
[```0]  
[A2LO]  
[A2LO]  
[A2LO]  
[`L-r]  
*Local-remote  
*Prompts may not appear, depending  
on controller configuration.  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key > to step  
through the prompt values. The  
Down-arrow key < backs through  
the values.  
Figure 5.2 -  
The System Menu.  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
5.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-System  
System Prompts  
˜
NOTE:  
After you step past the Set Point 2 prompt [`SP2] and the Idle Set Point  
prompt [IdSP] to the Operation menus, the Series 988 displays the menu  
selection ( [`SYS], [PidA] or [PidB] ) in the upper display and [OPEr] in  
the lower display.  
Decimal points may  
not always be in the  
position specified  
below depending  
on the the settings  
in the Decimal 1  
[dEC1]and Decimal  
2 [dEC2]parame-  
ters in the Input  
Menu.  
The Up-arrow > or Down-arrow key < selects another menu. Press the  
Mode key µ to display the first prompt in the lower display and its value  
in the upper display. Use the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys to  
change the value in the upper display. The new value will not take effect  
until after a five-second delay or until you press the Mode key µ.  
Set Point 2  
[`SP2]  
Select a second set point that will activate output 2. This allows you to  
boost the heating or cooling action of the output 1 device.  
• The range and default settings depend on the [`In1], [`rL1] and  
[`rH1] settings (Input Menu).  
[`SP2] This prompt appears only if [`Ot1] and [`Ot2] (Output Menu) are  
both set to [``Ht] or [``CL].  
[`rL1] … [`rH1]  
[`SP2]  
[`SP2]  
Idle Set Point  
[IdSP]  
Select the set point to be activated by an event input. This allows you  
to select a temperature that will be maintained when the application is  
idle.  
• The range and default settings depend on the [`In1], [`rL1] and  
[`rHI] settings (Input Menu).  
[IdSP] This prompt appears only if [`Ei1] or [`Ei2] (Global Menu) is set  
to [IdSP].  
[`rL1] … [`rH1]  
[IdSP]  
[IdSP]  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
5.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-System  
Event Input 1 Status  
[Ei1S]  
Indicates whether the event input 1 circuit is open or closed (read  
only).  
[Ei1S] This prompt appears only if [`Ei1] (Global Menu) is set to some-  
thing other than [``no].  
Default  
↓
[OpEn]  
[Ei1S]  
[CLOS]  
[Ei1S]  
Event Input 2 Status  
[Ei2S]  
Indicates whether the event input 2 circuit is open or closed (read  
only).  
[Ei2S] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with a second  
digital event input (98_ _-_5_ _-_ _ _ _) and with [`Ei2] (Global Menu) set  
to something other than [``no].  
Default  
↓
[OpEn]  
[Ei2S]  
[CLOS]  
[Ei2S]  
Alarm 2 Low  
[A2LO]  
Select the low trigger value for the output 2 alarm.  
[A2LO] This prompt appears only if [`AL2] (Output Menu) is set to some-  
thing other than [``no].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
lowest  
[`Pr1] or [`pr2]  
value of  
sensor  
range  
…
value of  
… [A2HI]  
[A2LO]  
[`AL2]  
[`AL2]  
[`rL1] (or [`rL2])  
(Input Menu)  
(Output Menu)  
[`dE1] or [`dE2] or [rAtE]  
[-999]  
[A2LO]  
…
[```0]  
[A2LO]  
[`AL2]  
[`AL2]  
[`AL2]  
(Output Menu)  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
5.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-System  
Alarm 2 High  
[A2HI]  
Select the high trigger value for the output 2 alarm.  
[A2HI] This prompt appears only if [`AL2] (Output Menu) is set to some-  
thing other than [``no].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
highest  
[`Pr1] or [`pr2]  
[A2LO]  
[A2HI]  
…
value of  
… value of  
sensor  
[`AL2]  
[`AL2]  
[`rH1] (or [`rH2])  
(Input Menu)  
(Output Menu)  
range  
[`dE1] or [`dE2]or [rAtE] [```0] … [`999]  
…
[9999]  
[A2HI]  
[`AL2]  
[`AL2]  
[`AL2]  
[A2HI]  
[A2HI]  
(Output Menu)  
Alarm 3 Low  
[A3LO]  
Select the low trigger value for the output 3 alarm.  
[A3LO] This prompt appears only if [`AL3] (Output Menu) is set to some-  
thing other than [``no].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
lowest  
[`Pr1] or [`pr2]  
value of  
sensor  
range  
…
value of  
… [A3HI]  
[A3LO]  
[`AL3]  
[`AL3]  
[`rL1] (or [`rL2])  
(Input Menu)  
(Output Menu)  
[`dE1] or [`dE2]or [rAtE]  
[-999]  
[A3LO]  
…
[```0]  
[A3LO]  
[`AL3]  
[`AL3]  
[`AL3]  
(Output Menu)  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
5.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-System  
Alarm 3 High  
[A3HI]  
Select the high trigger value for the output 3 alarm.  
[A3HI] This prompt appears only if [`AL3] (Output Menu) is set to some-  
thing other than [``no].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
highest  
[`Pr1] or [`pr2]  
[A3LO]… value of  
… value of  
sensor  
[`AL3]  
[`AL3]  
[A3HI]  
[`rH1] (or [`rH2])  
(Output Menu)  
(Input Menu)  
range  
[`dE1] or [`dE2]or [rAtE] [```0]… [`999]  
…
[9999]  
[A3HI]  
[`AL3]  
[`AL3]  
[`AL3]  
[A3HI]  
[A3HI]  
(Output Menu)  
Alarm 4 Low  
Select the low trigger value for the output 4 alarm.  
[A4LO]  
[A4LO] This prompt appears only if [`AL4] (Output Menu) is set to some-  
thing other than [``no].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
lowest  
[`Pr1] or [`pr2]  
value of …  
sensor  
value of  
… [A4HI]  
[A4LO]  
[`AL4  
[`AL4]  
[`rL1] (or [`rL2])  
(Input Menu)  
(Output Menu)  
range  
[`dE1] or [`dE2]or [rAtE]  
[-999]  
[A4LO]  
…
[```0]  
[A4LO]  
[`AL4]  
[`AL4]  
[`AL4]  
(Output Menu)  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
5.6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-System  
Alarm 4 High  
[A4HI]  
Select the high trigger value for the output 4 alarm.  
[A4HI] This prompt appears only if [`AL4] (Output Menu) is set to some-  
thing other than [``no].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
highest  
[`Pr1] or [`pr2]  
[A4LO] … value of  
… value of  
sensor  
[`AL4]  
[`AL4]  
[A4HI]  
[`rH1] (or [`rH2])  
(Output Menu)  
(Input Menu)  
range  
[`dE1] or [`dE2]or [rAtE] [```0] … [`999]  
…
[9999]  
[A4HI]  
[`AL4]  
[`AL4]  
[`AL4]  
[A4HI]  
[A4HI]  
(Output Menu)  
Auto-tune  
[`AUt]  
Initiate an auto-tune.  
[Pidb] appears only on controllers with enhanced software (98_B-_ _ _ _-_  
_ _) and with [ALgO] (Global Menu) set to [Pid2] or [cscd].  
[`AUt] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
NOTE:  
↓
[`OFF]  
[`AUt]  
For more informa-  
tion on auto-tune  
see Chapter 7.  
[PidA] [Pidb]  
[`AUt]  
[`AUt]  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
5.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-System  
Local-remote  
[`L-r]  
Select a local or remote set point. With [```r] selected the controller  
displays the remote set point rather than the internal (local) set point, and  
the set point cannot be changed with the Up-arrow or Down-arrow key.  
[`L-r] This prompt appears only if [`rSP] (Input Menu) is set to [``On].  
Default  
↓
[```L]  
[`L-r]  
[```r]  
[`L-r]  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
5.8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-PID A or B  
[PIDA]  
[Oper]  
Reaching the PID Menus  
Operation Prompt  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
MODE  
[````]  
[Pb1A]  
Proportional Band, Output 1A  
*Reset, Output 1A  
❶ Begin in the Display Loop, and  
press the Mode key µ to reach the  
Set Point 2 prompt [`SP2], the Idle  
Set Point prompt [IdSP] or the  
System Menu [`SYS].  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
[````]  
[RE1A]  
[````]  
[It1A]  
*Integral, Output 1  
A
Output 1 (p.5.10
)
[````]  
[rA1A]  
*Rate, Output 1  
A
[````]  
[dE1A]  
*Derivative, Output 1  
A
[````]  
[Ct1A] *Cycle Time, Output 1  
[`988]  
[`SP2]  
MODE  
A
Set Point 2  
MODE  
[````]  
[Pb2A]  
[`988]  
*Proportional Band, Output 2A  
[IdSP] Idle Set Point  
[````]  
[Re2A]  
*Reset, Output 2  
A
MODE  
[````]  
[It2A]  
*Integral, Output 2  
A
[`SyS]  
[OPEr]  
[PIDA]  
[OPEr]  
[PIdb]  
[OPEr]  
Output 2 (p. 5.13
)
[````]  
[rA2A]  
*Rate, Output 2  
A
System  
Menu  
p. 5.2  
PID A  
Menu  
p. 5.9  
PID B  
Menu  
p. 5.9  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
[````]  
[dE2A]  
*Derivative, Output 2  
A
[````]  
[Ct2A]  
*Cycle Time, Output 2  
A
[````]  
[db`A]  
*Dead Band A  
❷ Use Mode key µ to step past  
the Set Point 2 prompt [`SP2] and  
the Idle Set Point prompt [IdSP], if  
they appear (see prompt informa-  
tion). Upon reaching the Operation  
Menu prompt [OPEr] use the Up-  
arrow > key to select a menu.  
[PIdb]  
[OPer]  
*Operation Prompt  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
MODE  
{Pb1b]  
[RE1b]  
[It1b]  
[rA1b]  
[de1b]  
{CT1b}  
[Pb2b]  
[re2b]  
[It2b}  
[rA2b]  
[dE2b]  
[Ct2b]  
[db`b]  
*Proportional Band, Output 1B  
*Reset, Output 1B  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
*Integral, Output 1B  
*Rate, Output 1B  
(p. 5.10  
)
Output 1
❸ Press the Mode key µ to step  
through the prompts.  
*Derivative, Output 1B  
*Cycle Time, Output 1B  
…
…
*Prompts may not  
appear, depending on  
controller configuration.  
MODE  
*Proportional Band  
,
Output 2B  
[`)00]  
[dE1A]  
[`)01] [`)02]… [`(99]  
[dE1A]  
[dE1A]  
[dE1A]  
*Reset, Output 2B  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key > to  
step through the prompt values.  
The Down-arrow key < backs  
through the values.  
*Integral, Output 2B  
*Rate, Output 2B  
Output 2
(p. 5.13  
)
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
*Derivative, Output 2B  
*Cycle Time, Output 2B  
*Dead Band B  
Figure 5.9 -  
The PID Menus.  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
5.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-PID A or B  
PID A or PID B Prompts  
˜
NOTE:  
After you step past the Set Point 2 prompt [`SP2] and the Idle Set Point  
prompt [IdSP] to the Operation menus, the Series 988 displays the menu  
selection ( [`SYS], [PidA] or [Pidb] ) in the upper display and [OPEr] in  
the lower display.  
Decimal points may  
not always be in the  
position specified  
below depending  
on the the settings  
in the Decimal 1  
[dEC1]and Decimal  
2 [dEC2]parame-  
ters in the Input  
Menu.  
The Up-arrow > or Down-arrow key < selects another menu. Press the  
Mode key µ to display the first prompt in the lower display and its value  
in the upper display. Use the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys to  
change the value in the upper display. The new value will not take effect  
until after a five-second delay or until you press the Mode key µ.  
Proportional Band, Output 1A or 1B  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1b]  
Select the proportional band for PID output 1. If set to [```0] it func-  
tions as an on/off control, and the switching differential is determined by  
the [HYS1] value (Output Menu). The decimal precision is determined by  
[dEC1] (Input Menu).  
[Pb1A] This prompt always appears.  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
&
…
…
[``°F] [```0] [``25] [9999]  
[``US]  
[`dFL]  
[`C_F]  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
˜
(Calibration Menu)(Global Menu)  
NOTE:  
&
…
[`r†d] [``)0] [``25] [99(9]  
…
The PID B Menu  
appears only on  
controllers with  
enhanced software  
(98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _)  
and with [AhgO]set  
to [Pid2].  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
Input 1 or 2  
(Input Menu)  
&
…
[``°C] [```0] [``14] [9999]  
[`C_F]  
…
[``US]  
[`dFL]  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
(Calibration Menu)(Global Menu)  
&
&
…
[`r†d] [``)0] [``14] [99(9]  
Input 1 or 2  
(Input Menu)  
…
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
…
…
[``SI]  
[`dFL]  
[Pid2] [``)0] [``#0] [99(9] % of span  
[ALgO]  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
[Pb1A]  
(Calibration Menu) (Global Menu)  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
5.10  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-PID A or B  
Reset, Output 1A or 1B  
[rE1A]  
[rE1b]  
Tune reset to eliminate the offset or droop between the set point and  
the actual process temperature for PID output 1. When set to [```0]  
reset is disabled.  
[rE1A] This prompt appears only if [`dFL] (Calibration Menu) is set to  
[``US] and [Pb1A] is not set to [```0].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
[00)0] … [99(9] repeats/min.  
[rE1A]  
[rE1A]  
[`Pdr]  
[ALG0]  
[=0)0]% … [``)0]% … [10)0]%  
[rE1A]  
[rE1A]  
[rE1A]  
(Global Menu)  
Integral, Output 1A or 1B  
[It1A]  
[It1b]  
Tune integral to eliminate the offset or droop between the set point  
and the actual process temperature for PID output 1. When set to  
[```0] integral is disabled.  
[It1A] This prompt appears only if [`dFL] (Calibration Menu) is set to  
[``S1] and [Pb1A] is not set to [```0].  
˜
The PID B Menu  
appears only on  
controllers with  
enhanced software  
(98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _).  
Default  
NOTE:  
↓
[`)00] … [9(99] min. / repeat  
[It1A]  
[It1A]  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
5.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-PID A or B  
Rate, Output 1A or 1B  
[rA1A]  
[rA1b]  
Adjust the rate to eliminate overshoot on startup or after the set  
point changes. The rate setting will not influence the percent power if the  
process temperature is more than twice the proportional band from the set  
point. When set to [```0] rate is disabled.  
[rA1A] This prompt appears only if [`dfL] (Calibration Menu) is set to  
[``US] and [Pb1A] is set higher than [```0].  
Default  
↓
[`)00] … [`(99] min.  
[rA1A]  
[rA1A]  
Derivative, Output 1A or 1B  
[dE1A]  
[dE1b]  
Adjust the derivative to eliminate overshoot on startup or after the  
set point changes. The derivative setting will not influence the percent  
power if the process temperature is more than twice the proportional band  
from the set point. When set to [```0] derivative is disabled.  
[dE1A] This prompt appears only if [`dFL] (Calibration Menu) is set to  
[``SI] and [Pb1A] is set higher than [```0].  
Default  
˜
The PID B Menu  
appears only on  
controllers with  
enhanced software  
(98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _).  
↓
NOTE:  
[`)00] … [`(99] min.  
[dE1A]  
[dE1A]  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
5.12  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-PID A or B  
Cycle Time, Output 1A or 1B  
[Ct1A]  
[Ct1b]  
Select the time, in seconds, of a complete on/off cycle.  
[Ct1A] This prompt appears only if [`In1] (Input Menu) is not set to a  
process, [CntL] (Global Menu) is not set to [CSCd] and [Pb1A] is set high-  
er than [```0].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
mechanical  
[``%0]… [`1)0] … [99(9] min.  
relay  
[Ct1A]  
[Ct1A]  
[Ct1A]  
outputs  
open collector  
or solid-state  
relay outputs  
[brSt]  
[Ct1A]  
[``)1]… [``!0] … [99(9] min.  
[Ct1A]  
[Ct1A]  
[Ct1A]  
Proportional Band, Output 2A or 2B  
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2B]  
Select the proportional band for PID output 2. If set to [```0] it func-  
tions as an on/off control, and the switching differential is determined by  
the [HYS2] value (Output Menu). Decimal precision is determined by the  
[`dEC1] or [`dEC2] setting (Input Menu).  
[Pb2A] This prompt appears only if [CntL] (Global Menu) is not set to  
[CSCd] and if [`Ot2] (Output Menu) is set to [``Ht] or [``CL] or if [ALg0]  
(Global Menu) is set to [dUPL].  
˜
NOTE:  
The PID B Menu  
appears only on  
controllers with  
enhanced software  
(98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _).  
If  
Default  
↓
[``US]  
[`dFL]  
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
[```0]…[``25]…[9999]  
&
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
(Calibration Menu) (Global Menu)  
[`r†d]  
Input 1 or 2  
(Input Menu)  
[``)0]…[``25]…[99(9]  
&
&
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
[``US]  
[`dFL]  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[```0] [``14]…[9999]  
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
(Calibration Menu) (Global Menu)  
[`r†d]  
Input 1 or 2  
[``)0]…[``14]…[99(9]  
&
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
(Input Menu)  
[``SI]  
[`dFL]  
[``)0]…[``#0]…[99(9]  
% of span  
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
[Pb2A]  
(Calibration Menu)  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
5.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-PID A or B  
Reset, Output 2A or 2B  
[rE2A]  
[rE2b]  
Tune reset to eliminate the offset or droop between the set point and  
the actual process temperature for PID A output 2. When set to [```0]  
reset is disabled.  
[rE2A] This prompt appears only if [`dFL] (Calibration Menu) is set to  
[``US] and [Pb2A] is set higher than [```0].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
[00)0] … [99(9] repeats/min.  
[rE2A]  
[rE2A]  
[`Pdr]  
[ALG0]  
[=0)0]%… [``)0]%… [10)0]%  
[rE2A]  
[rE2A]  
[rE2A]  
(Global Menu)  
Integral, Output 2A or 2B  
[It2A]  
[It2b]  
Tune integral to eliminate the offset or droop between the set point  
and the actual process temperature for PID output 2. When set to  
[```0] integral is disabled.  
[It2A] This prompt appears only if [`dFL] (Calibration Menu) is set to  
[``SI] and [Pb2A] is set higher than [```0].  
˜
NOTE:  
The PID B Menu  
appears only on  
controllers with  
enhanced software  
(98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _).  
Default  
↓
[`)00] … [9(99]repeats / min.  
[It2A]  
[It2A]  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
5.14  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-PID A or B  
Rate, Output 2  
[rA2A]  
[rA2b]  
Adjust the rate to eliminate overshoot on startup or after the set  
point changes. The rate setting will not influence the percent power if the  
process temperature is more than twice the proportional band from the  
set point. When set to [```0] rate is disabled.  
[rA2A] This prompt appears only if [`dFL] (Calibration Menu) is set to  
[``US] and [Pb2A] is set higher than [```0].  
Default  
↓
[`)00] … [`(99]min.  
[rA2A]  
[rA2A]  
Derivative, Output 2A or 2B  
[dE2A]  
[dE2b]  
Adjust the derivative to eliminate overshoot on startup or after the  
set point changes. The derivative setting will not influence the percent  
power if the process temperature is more than twice the proportional band  
from the set point. When set to [```0] derivative is disabled.  
[dE2A] This prompt appears only if [`dFL] (Calibration Menu) is set to  
[``SI] and [Pb2A] is set higher than [```0].  
Default  
˜
↓
NOTE:  
[`)00] … [`(99]min.  
The PID B Menu  
appears only on  
controllers with  
enhanced software  
(98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _).  
[dE2A]  
[dE2A]  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
5.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation-PID A or B  
Cycle Time, Output 2A or 2B  
[Ct2A]  
[Ct2b]  
Select the time, in seconds, of a complete on/off cycle.  
[Ct2A] This prompt appears only if [CntL] (Global Menu) is not set to  
[CSCd] and [Pb2A] is set higher than [```0].  
If  
Default  
↓
↓
mechanical  
[``%0] … [`1)0] … [99(9]  
relay  
[Ct2A]  
[Ct2A]  
[Ct2A]  
outputs  
open collector  
or solid-state  
relay outputs  
[brSt]  
[Ct2A]  
[``)1] … [``!0] … [99(9]  
[Ct2A]  
[Ct2A]  
[Ct2A]  
Dead Band A or B  
[db`A]  
[db`b]  
Select the width of the zone between the action of the heating output  
and the cooling output. If you select a positive value the heat and cool  
outputs cannot be energized at the same time. If you select a negative  
value, both outputs can be energized at the same time.  
• If a process input is selected the decimal precision will be determined by  
the [`dEC1] setting (Input Menu).  
˜
[db`A] This prompt appears only if [Pb2A] is set higher than [```0] and  
one output performs heating action and the other performs cooling action.  
NOTE:  
The PID B Menu  
appears only on  
controllers with  
enhanced software  
(98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _).  
If  
Default  
↓
[``°F]  
[`C_F]  
(Global Menu)  
↓
[-999] … [```0] … [`999]  
[db`A]  
[db`A]  
[db`A]  
[``°C]  
[`C_F]  
[-555] … [```0] … [`555]  
[db`A]  
[db`A]  
[db`A]  
(Global Menu)  
a process  
[-999] … [```0] … [`999]units  
input is selected  
[db`A]  
[db`A]  
[db`A]  
Operation Menus, Chapter 5  
5.16  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6 The Factory Menus  
Navigating the Factory Menus  
˜
To reach the Factory Menus, begin in the Display Loop and press the Up-  
arrow > and Down-arrow < keys together and hold for three seconds.  
The [`SEt] prompt will appear in the lower display. Press and hold the  
Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys together again for three seconds  
until the [Fcty] prompt appears in the lower display. The Factory Menus  
will not appear if the hardware lockout DIP is set to on. (See Chapter 1 for  
more information on DIP switch settings.) The three Factory Menus are:  
Panel Lockout [PLOC]; Diagnostics [diAg]; and Calibration [`CAL]. Upon  
reaching the Factory Menu prompt [Fcty] use the Up-arrow > or Down-  
arrow < key to select a menu and the Mode key µ to step through a  
menu.  
NOTE:  
The Factory Menus  
will not appear if the  
hardware lockout  
DIP is set to on.  
See Chapter 1 for  
more information.  
˜
NOTE:  
You will not see every prompt in any of these menus. The unit’s configura-  
tion and model number determine which prompts appear. After stepping  
through each menu, the Series 988 returns to the Factory Menu prompt  
[Fcty]. Use the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys to select the next  
menu, or use the Mode key µ to advance through the same menu again.  
To move backwards through the menu hold down the Mode key µ and  
press the Up-arrow key >. Use the Up-arrow > or Down-arrow <  
key to change the prompt setting.  
The Factory Menus  
can only be entered  
when the setup  
prompt [`SEt] is  
displayed.  
˜
NOTE:  
WATL  
W
❶ Press the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys  
together and hold until the [`SEt] prompt appears in  
the lower display. Press and hold again until the  
[Fcty] prompt appears in the lower display.  
Press the Display  
key ∂ to return to  
the Display Loop  
from any point in  
any menu.  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
[PLOC] [diAg] [`CAL]  
[Fcty]  
[Fcty]  
[Fcty]  
Panel  
Lockout  
Menu  
Diagnostics Calibration  
Menu  
p 6.7  
Menu  
p 6.13  
Figure 6.1 -  
p 6.2  
Navigating the  
Factory Menus.  
WATL  
W
PROCESS  
❷ Use the Up-arrow key > to select one of the  
Factory Menus.  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
6.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Panel Lockout  
Reaching the Panel  
Lockout Menu  
[PLOC]  
[Fcty]  
Factory Prompt  
Front Panel Lockout  
System Menu  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller’s  
upper display.  
MODE  
[````]  
[`LOC]  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
[````]  
[`SYS]  
WATL  
W
[````]  
[PidA]  
PROCESS  
PID A Menu  
[````]  
[PidB]  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
*PID B Menu  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
% OUT  
[````]  
[Inpt]  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
Input Menu  
M
[````]  
[Otpt]  
SERIES 988  
Output Menu  
❸ Select the Panel Lockout Menu,  
then press the Mode key µ to step  
through the prompts.  
[````]  
[GlbL]  
Global Menu  
[````]  
[COM]  
*Communications Menu  
Diagnostics Menu  
Calibration Menu  
[````]  
[Diag]  
[````]  
[`CAL]  
[FULL] [rEAd] [nonE]  
[InPt]  
[Inpt]  
[Inpt]  
*Prompts may not appear, depending  
on controller configuration.  
[```3]  
[`LOC]  
[```0]  
[`LOC]  
[```2]  
[`LOC]  
[```1]  
[`LOC]  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key > or the  
Down-arrow key < to select one of  
the prompt values.  
Figure 6.2 -  
The Panel Lockout  
Menu.  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
6.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Panel Lockout  
Panel Lockout Prompts  
When you are in the Factory menus, the Series 988 displays the menu  
selection ( [PLOC], [diAg] or [`CAL] ) in the upper display and [FctY] in  
the lower display.  
The Up-arrow > or Down-arrow key < selects another menu. Press the  
Mode key µ to display the first prompt in the lower display and its value  
in the upper display. Use the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow < keys to  
change the value in the upper display. The new value will not take effect  
until after a five-second delay or until you press the Mode key µ.  
Front Panel Lockout  
Sets the Lockout level for the Front Panel. This allows you to disable  
keys on the front of the controller.  
[`LOC]  
• [```0] enables all keys.  
ç
• [```1] disables the Mode key µ.  
CAUTION:  
• [```2] disables the Mode key µ and the Auto/Man key å.  
Setting [`LOC] to  
[```2] or [```3]  
disables the  
• [```3] disables the Mode key µ and the Auto/Man key å and locks  
the set point value.  
Auto/Man key å  
and will force the  
controller into man-  
ual mode if an open  
sensor occurs.  
Verify that the con-  
troller is operating  
in the desired mode  
(auto or manual)  
before setting the  
lockout level.  
[`LOC] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[```0] [```1] [```2] [```3]  
[`LOC]  
[`LOC]  
[`LOC]  
[`LOC]  
Failure to do so  
could result in dam-  
age to equipment  
and or property.  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
6.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Panel Lockout  
The prompts within the Panel Lockout Menu allow you to lockout an  
entire menu. You can set the level of lockout to none [nonE], read only  
[rEAd], or lockout read and write [FULL].  
System Menu  
[`SYS]  
[PidA]  
[PidB]  
Select the lockout level for the System Menu. Set the System Menu  
lockout to no lockout [none], read only [read] or full lockout [FULL].  
[`LOC] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[`SYS]  
[`SYS]  
[`SYS]  
PID A Menu  
Select the lockout level for the PID A Menu. Set the PID A Menu lock-  
out to no lockout [none], read only [read] or full lockout [FULL].  
[PidA] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[PiDA]  
[pida]  
[pida]  
PID B Menu  
Select the lockout level for the PID B Menu. Set the PID B Menu lock-  
out to no lockout [none], read only [read] or full lockout [FULL].  
[PidB] This prompt appears only on controllers with enhanced software  
(98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _) and with [ALgO] (Global Menu) set to [Pid2] or  
[CntL] (Global Menu) set to [CSCd].  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[PiDb]  
[pidb]  
[pidb]  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
6.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Panel Lockout  
Input Menu  
[Inpt]  
[Otpt]  
[GLBL]  
Select the lockout level for the Input Menu. Set the Input Menu lock-  
out to no lockout [none], read only [read] or full lockout [FULL].  
[InPt] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[Inpt]  
[InPt]  
[Inpt]  
Output Menu  
Select the lockout level for the Output Menu. Set the Output Menu  
lockout to no lockout [none], read only [read] or full lockout [FULL].  
[OtPt] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[Otpt]  
[Otpt]  
[Otpt]  
Global Menu  
Select the lockout level for the Global Menu. Set the Global Menu lock-  
out to no lockout [none], read only [read] or full lockout [FULL].  
[gLbL] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[GLBL]  
[GLBL]  
[GLBL]  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
6.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Panel Lockout  
Communications Menu  
Select the lockout level for the Communications Menu. Set the  
Communications Menu lockout to no lockout [none], read only [read] or  
full lockout [FULL].  
[COM]  
[COM] This prompt appears only on controllers equipped with  
Communications hardware (98_ _ -_ _ _ _-_R_ _ or 98_ _ -_ _ _ _-_S_ _ ).  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[COM]  
[COM]  
[COM]  
Diagnostics Menu  
[diag]  
[`CAL]  
Select the lockout level for the Diagnostics Menu. Set the Diagnostics  
Menu lockout to no lockout [none], read only [read] or full lockout  
[FULL].  
[diAg] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[Diag]  
[diag]  
[diag]  
Calibration Menu  
Select the lockout level for the Calibration Menu. Set the Calibration  
Menu lockout to no lockout [none], read only [read] or full lockout  
[FULL].  
[`CAL] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[none] [read] [FULL]  
[`CAL]  
[`CAL]  
[`CAL]  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
6.6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Diagnostics  
[Diag]  
[Fcty] Factory Prompt  
Reaching the Diagnostics Menu  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
MODE  
?
[date]  
Factory Ship Date  
❶ Press the Up-arrow > and Down-arrow  
< keys together and hold until the  
[`SEt] prompt appears in the lower dis-  
play. Press and hold again until the [Fcty]  
prompt appears in the lower display.  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
?
[SOft]  
Software Revision  
?
[Sn--]  
Serial Number  
?
[AMB]  
Ambient Temperature  
?
[Acnt]  
Ambient A/D count  
?
[`gnd]  
Ground A/D count  
[PLOC] [diAg] [`CAL]  
?
[cnt1]  
[Fcty]  
[Fcty]  
[Fcty]  
Input 1 A/D count  
Panel  
Lockout  
Menu  
Diagnostics Calibration  
?
[cnt2]  
Menu  
p 6.7  
Menu  
p 6.13  
Input 2 A/D count  
p 6.2  
?
[ity1]  
Input 1 Module Type  
❷ Use the Up-arrow > key to step from  
the Panel Lockout Menu [PLOC] to the  
Diagnostics Menu [diag].  
?
[ity2]  
MODE  
Input 2 Module Type  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
?
[Oty1]  
Output 1 Module Type  
Output 2 Module Type  
Output 3 Module Type  
Output 4 Module Type  
Test Display  
?
[Oty2]  
❸ Press the Mode key µ to step through  
the prompts.  
?
[Oty3]  
?
[Oty4]  
?
[dISP]  
[``no] [`YES]  
[dISP] [dISP]  
?
[tout]  
Test Outputs  
?
[OPLP]  
Open Loop  
[`OFF] [out1]  
[tout] [tout]  
…
[out4]  
[tout]  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key > or the Down-  
arrow key < to select one of the prompt  
values.  
Figure 6.7 -  
The Diagnostics Menu.  
In the Diagnostics Menu only the values of  
[dISP], [tout] and [OPLP] can be  
changed.  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
6.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Diagnostics  
Factory Ship Date  
[DAte]  
[sOft]  
[Sn--]  
Shows the date that the final factory control test was performed. The  
first two digits represent the week as numbered from [01--] to [52--].  
The second two digits represent the year [--94], [--95], etc…  
[dAtE] This prompt always appears.  
Software Revision  
[`yes]  
Shows the controller’s software revision code when set to  
letter should match the software revision code on the cover of the manual  
that came with your controller; [```n] and W988-XUMN Rev N00.  
. This  
[SOFt] This prompt always appears.  
Serial Number  
Shows the controller’s serial number. The first two letters in the upper  
display are to indicate that the controller is in serial number mode. The  
right half of the upper display shows the first two digits of the serial num-  
ber. The lower display shows the last four digits of the serial number.  
[Sn34]  
[5678]  
This is what the controller with the serial number 0988345678 would dis-  
play.  
[Sn--] This prompt always appears.  
Ambient Temperature  
[AMB]  
Shows the ambient temperature at the Input 1 terminals. The temper-  
ature is shown in °F in the form [00)0] regardless of the settings of  
[deC1], [deC2], [`dfL] or [`C_F].  
[AMb] This prompt always appears.  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
6.8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Diagnostics  
Factory Use Only  
[acnt]  
[`gnd]  
[cnt1]  
[cnt2]  
These prompts are used only at the factory.  
[Acnt] [`gnd] [cnt1] [cnt2] These prompts always appear.  
Inputs 1 and 2 Module Types  
[ity1]  
[ity2]  
Displays which input module is installed in the controller. Please doc-  
ument this value before contacting the factory for technical assistance.  
Input Types  
• [none] No input module  
• [``tc] Thermocouple only module  
• [Curr] Current detect  
• [SLid] Slidewire module  
• [UOFF] Universal off  
• [Urtd] Universal rtd  
• [Utch] Universal high-gain thermocouple  
• [UtcL] Universal low-gain thermocouple  
• [UMu] Universal millivolts  
• [UPrc] Universal process  
• [`Ei2] Event input 2  
[ity1] [ity2] These prompts always appear.  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
6.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Diagnostics  
Outputs 1, 2, 3 and 4 Module Types  
[Oty1]  
[Oty2]  
[Oty3]  
[Oty4]  
Display the controller’s output module. Please document this value  
before contacting the factory for technical assistance.  
Output Types  
• [none] no output module (A)  
• [SSr1] 0.5A solid-state relay (K)  
• [SS1S] 0.5A solid-state relay with suppression (B)  
• [``dc] switched dc open collector (C)  
• [rLyc] form C relay (E)  
• [rLcS] form C relay with suppression (D)  
• [rLAb] relay A/B (J)  
• [Proc] process output (F)  
• [Uret] voltage/retransmit (N)  
• [Iret] current/retransmit (M)  
• [SpLy] power supply (T)  
• [`232] EIA/TIA-232 communications (R)  
• [`485] EIA/TIA-485 or EIA/TIA-422 communications (S)  
• [`232] EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485 communications (U)  
[Oty1] [Oty2] [Oty3] [Oty4] These prompts always appear.  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
6.10  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Diagnostics  
Test Displays  
[disp]  
Runs a brief test of the controller’s displays and LEDs. To run the test,  
scroll through the Diagnostics Menu until [disp] is shown in the lower  
display. Use the Up-arrow key > or Down-arrow key < to select  
[`YES] from the upper display and press the mode key µ.  
The controller will run pattern tests, blink all the LEDs on and off, and  
end with the model number in both displays.  
[diSP] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[``no]  
[disp]  
[`yes]  
[disp]  
Test Outputs  
[tout]  
This prompt tests each output. To run the test, scroll through the  
Diagnostics Menu until [tout] is shown in the lower display. Use the Up-  
arrow key > or Down-arrow key < to select an output [out1], [out2],  
[out3], or [out4]. The LED for that output should light after a second or  
two indicating that the output has been successfully energized. Do not  
press the mode key µ to activate the test; it starts automatically when  
anything other than [`OFF] is selected.  
If any of the LEDs fail to light contact the factory.  
[tout] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[`OFF] [out1] [out2] [out3] [out4]  
[tout]  
[tout]  
[tout]  
[tout]  
[tout]  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
6.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Diagnostic  
Open Loop  
[OPLP]  
Checks the control loop, consisting of the controller output, power  
control, heater and sensor. With open loop enabled, the controller moni-  
tors the output power level and checks for a change in the process input  
value. If the output power is at maximum for a period of time equal to the  
reset time and the process input has not changed by at least ±5°F, the  
controller will switch to manual mode at 0% output power and [OPLP] will  
be displayed in the lower display.  
To clear this error, enter the Setup Menu and press the display key ∂.  
To get back into auto mode, press the Auto/Man key å.  
[OPLP] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[`OFF]  
[``on]  
[OPLP]  
[OPLP]  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
6.12  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Calibration  
[`CAL]  
[Fcty]  
Diagnostics Prompt  
Enter your settings,  
from the controller's  
upper display.  
Reaching the Calibration  
Menu  
MODE  
?
[A`50]  
❶ Begin in the Display Loop, and  
press the Up-arrow > and Down-  
arrow < key simultaneously for six  
seconds until the Setup Menu [`SEt],  
then the Factory Menu [fcty]  
appear.  
❷ Use the Up-arrow key > or Down-  
arrow key < to step through the  
Factory Menu to the Calibration Menu  
[`CAL].  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
?
[A`00]  
?
[``tc]  
?
[b380]  
?
[a`0H]  
MODE  
?
[b10U]  
?
[A`20]  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
?
[b`0U  
?
[A`15]  
?
[b20A]  
?
[A380]  
?
[b`4A]  
[PLOC] [diAg] [`CAL]  
?
[A10U]  
[Fcty]  
[Fcty]  
[Fcty]  
?
[b`0U]  
MODE  
Panel  
Lockout  
Menu  
Diagnostics Calibration  
?
[A`0U]  
Menu  
p 6.7  
Menu  
p 6.13  
?
[b100]  
p 6.2  
?
[A20A]  
❸ Press the Mode key µ to step  
through the prompts.  
MODE  
?
[1`4`]  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
?
[A`4A]  
?
[1`20]  
?
[A`OU]  
[``no] [`YES]  
[`rSt] [`rSt]  
?
[1`0`]  
?
[A100]  
?
[1`10]  
❹ Press the Up-arrow key > or the  
Down-arrow key < to select one of  
the prompt values.  
?
[b`50]  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
?
[2`4`]  
?
[b`00]  
Refer to Ca libra ting Wa tlow Proces s  
Controls for information about the  
Calibration Menu.  
?
[2`20]  
?
[b`0H]  
?
[2`0`]  
?
[b`20]  
ç
CAUTION:  
?
[2`10]  
?
[b`15]  
Before attempting to calibrate, make sure  
you have the proper equipment called for in  
each procedure. The Series 988 is calibrat-  
ed and tested before it leaves the factory.  
Attempting to calibrate the controller with-  
out the proper equipment could result in  
damage to property and/or equipment.  
?
[`3LO]  
?
[`3HI]  
?
[`rSt]  
Restore  
MODE  
?
[`dFL]  
Default  
Figure 6.13 -  
The Calibration Menu.  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
6.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Factory-Calibration  
Restore  
[`rst]  
[`YES]  
Restores the original factory calibration values when set to  
.
This is a simple way to recover from a mistake made while calibrating the  
controller.  
[`rSt] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[``no]  
[`rSt]  
[`yes]  
[`rSt]  
[`dfl]  
Default  
Set the operating parameter defaults to domestic or international  
measures.  
• [``US] (domestic) sets the controller to °F; rate in minutes; proportional  
band in degrees or units; and reset in repeats per minute.  
• [``SI] (international) sets the controller to °C; derivative in minutes;  
proportional band in percent of span; and integral in minutes per repeat.  
[`dFL] This prompt always appears.  
Default  
↓
[``US]  
[`dFL]  
[``sI]  
[`dFL]  
Factory Menus, Chapter 6  
6.14  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 Tuning, Manual Operation,  
Alarms and Error Codes  
Auto-tuning (Heat and/or Cool)  
The Series 988 can automatically tune the PID parameters to fit the char-  
acteristics of your particular thermal system.  
Standard software units (98_ A -_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _) have 1 set of PID parame-  
ters. Units with enhanced software (98_ B -_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _) and [AlgO] set  
to [Pid2] (Global Menu) have two sets of PID parameters, PID A and PID  
B. Only one PID set can be auto-tuned at a time. For information on tun-  
ing a cascade system, see Chapter 8.  
˜
NOTE:  
A useful reference  
on tuning is Tuning  
of Industrial Control  
Systems by Arman-  
do B. Corripio, pub-  
lished by the  
Before beginning the auto-tune sequence, make sure the [AtSP] parame-  
ter located in the Global Menu is at the proper setting. This allows the  
user to select the tuning set point as a percentage of the current control  
set point. See Chapter 4 for more information on this parameter. The fig-  
ure below uses the default setting, 90%, to define the auto-tuning process.  
Instrument Society  
of America.  
Once the auto-tune sequence has begun, the output 1 and output 2 pro-  
portional band is set to 0 and the control goes into an on/off mode of con-  
trol at the set point percentage determined by the [AtSP] parameter. The  
displayed set point remains unchanged.  
NOTE:  
Auto-tune can be  
initiated if [`rSp]  
is set to [``on].  
NOTE:  
For information  
about tuning a cas-  
cade system, see  
Chapter 9.  
Auto-tuning at a set point of 200°F  
auto-tune  
begins  
auto-tune  
complete  
NOTE:  
Before attempting to  
auto-tune a cascade  
system, see  
set point  
200°  
Cascade Setup in  
Chapter 9.  
180°  
process  
90% of  
set point  
( [AtSP]default setting)  
100°  
Figure 7.1 -  
Auto-tuning  
example.  
Time  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
7.1  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuning  
When the control finishes “learning” the system, it resumes standard PID  
control using the PID values established by the auto-tuning process.  
Changing the set point during an auto-tune restarts the auto-tune proce-  
dure.  
During auto-tuning the process must cross the set point four times within  
an 80-minute time span for the Series 988 to successfully complete the  
auto-tune. If this does not happen within the 80-minute time limit, the  
Series 988 chooses PID values based on the 80-minute tuning cycle per-  
formed.  
ç
CAUTION:  
If a mechanical  
relay or contactor is  
switching power to  
the load, a longer  
cycle time may be  
desirable to mini-  
mize wear on the  
mechanical compo-  
nents. The typical  
life of a mechanical  
relay is 100,000  
cycles. Verify that  
the cycle time  
To start auto-tuning:  
1. Press the Mode key µ to advance to the System Menu [`SyS].  
Press the Mode key µ to advance through the menu until the [`AUt]  
prompt appears in the lower display.  
2. Use the Up-arrow > or Down-arrow < key to select [PidA]or [Pidb],  
if your controller is equipped with enhanced software (98_ B -_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _)  
.
Only one PID set can be auto-tuned at a time.  
3. Press the Display key ¥. While the control is in the tuning mode  
the lower display alternates every second between the normal informa-  
tion and the [tunE] prompt.  
selected is appro-  
priate for the output  
device type. Failure  
to do so could  
result in damage to  
equipment and/or  
property.  
4. When tuning is complete, the displays return to their previous state  
and [`AUt] reverts to [`OFF]. The Series 988 installs the PID tuning  
parameters it has calculated and saves them in non-volatile memory.  
To abort auto-tuning either reset the [`AUt] prompt to off, press the  
Auto/Man key å twice, or cycle power off and on. In all cases, aborting  
auto-tune restores all values to their state before auto-tuning began.  
Manual Tuning  
For optimum control performance, tune the Series 988 to your thermal  
system. The tuning settings here are for a broad spectrum of applications;  
your system may have somewhat different requirements. NOTE: This is a  
slow procedure that may take hours to obtain optimum values.  
Tune heating outputs at a set point above the ambient process value.  
Tune cooling outputs at a set point below the ambient process value.  
If your controller is equipped with enhanced software (98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _  
_ _), the [Pidb] parameters may need to be tuned also. Perform this  
procedure on both PID sets, they are functionally identical. The para-  
meters within the procedure apply to both output 1 and 2, and PID A  
and B.  
7.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuning  
1. Apply power to the Series 988 and enter a set point. Begin with  
[``Pb] set to [```1]; [``rE] or [``It] set to [`0)0]; [``rA] or [``dE]  
set to [`0)0]; [``Ct] set to [``%0]; [`CAL] set to [```0]; and [`AUt]  
set to [`OFF].  
2. Proportional Band Adjustment: Gradually increase [``Pb] until the  
upper display process value stabilizes at a constant value. The process  
value will not be right on set point because the initial reset value is  
0.00 repeats per minute. (If [``Pb] is set to [```0] then [``rE],  
[``It], [``rA] and [``dE] are inoperative, and the Series 988 func-  
tions as a simple on/off control.) The [`HYS] prompt determines the  
switching differential value.  
3. Reset/Integral Adjustment: Gradually increase [``rE] or [``It] until  
the upper display process value begins to oscillate or “hunt.” Then  
slowly decrease [``rE] or [``It] until the upper display stabilizes  
again near set point.  
4. Cycle Time Adjustment: Set [``Ct] as required. Faster cycle times  
sometimes achieve the best system control. See Chapter 8 for more  
information on the burst fire feature. However, if a mechanical contac-  
tor or solenoid is switching power to the load, a longer cycle time may  
be desirable to minimize wear on the mechanical components.  
Experiment until the cycle time is consistent with the quality of control  
you want. [``Ct] will not appear on units with a process output (98_ _  
-_ _ F _-_ _ _ _ or 98_ _ -_ _ _ F -_ _ _ _).  
5. Rate/Derivative Adjustment: Increase [``rA] or [``dE] to 0.10  
minute. Then raise set point by 20° to 30°F, or 11° to 17°C. Observe the  
system’s approach to the set point. If the load process value overshoots  
the set point, increase [``rA] or [``dE] to 0.50 minutes.  
Raise the set point by 20° to 30°F, or 11° to 17°C and watch the  
approach to the new set point. If you increase [``rA] or [``dE] too  
much, the approach to set point will be very sluggish. Repeat as neces-  
sary until the system rises to the new set point without overshooting or  
approaching the set point too slowly.  
6. Calibration Offset Adjustment: You may want your system to control  
to a process value other than the value coming from the input sensor.  
If so, measure the difference between that process value (perhaps at  
another point in the system) and the process value showing in the  
upper display. Then enter the [`CAL] offset value you want.  
Calibration offset adds or subtracts degrees from the value of the input  
signal.  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
7.3  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto/Man  
Manual and Automatic Operation  
To change from auto to manual operation, press the Auto/Man key å  
twice.  
Manual operation provides open-loop control of the outputs from a range  
of -100% to 100% output. The Series 988 allows a negative output value  
only when [`Ot1] or [`Ot2] (Output Menu) is set to [``CL] (cool).  
Automatic operation provides closed-loop on/off or PID control. When the  
operator transfers from a closed loop to an open loop, the Series 988 sets  
the power level to the setting of the [FAIL] parameter. If [FAIL] is set to  
[BPLS] the controller retains the power level from the closed-loop control.  
When the Series 988 returns to closed-loop control, it restores the previ-  
ous set-point process value.  
˜
NOTE:  
When a sensor  
opens, the con-  
troller switches  
from automatic to  
manual operation.  
The Auto/Man LED (located on the Auto/Man key å) indicates whether  
the controller is in automatic or manual operation. When the LED is lit,  
the control is in manual operation. When the LED is off, it is in automatic  
operation. When the LED flashes, press the key again within five seconds  
to complete the change in operation.  
• If [FAIL] is set to [BPLS] and the process has stabilized at a power level  
less than 75% ( 5%) for a two-minute period prior to the sensor break,  
then the Series 988 switches to manual operation at the last automatic  
power level. If these conditions are not met, the output goes to 0% power  
(output disabled).  
When transferring from automatic to manual operation, the control out-  
put, or outputs, remain stable — a bumpless, or smooth, transition. The  
lower display changes from the set point to the % output value.  
• If [FAIL] is set from [`=00] to [`100], the Series 988 switches to man-  
ual operation at that percent power.  
7.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarms  
Changing the Output 3 Alarm Jumper  
If you have model number 98 _ _ -_ _ _ _- J _ _ _ , output 3 can be con-  
figured as a Form A (NO and common contact) or Form B (NC and com-  
mon contact) alarm. To change the alarm jumper:  
1. Remove the control from the case. Release the two tabs on one side of  
the control, then release the two tabs on the opposite side. You may  
need to rock the bezel back and forth several times to release the chas-  
sis.  
2. Set the jumper to the position you want. See below for jumper location.  
NC  
NO  
Contacts  
Contacts  
Figure 7.5 -  
Alarm jumper  
location.  
(Form B)  
(Form A)  
Controller Chassis - Top View  
3. Return the controller chassis to the case. Be sure you have it oriented  
correctly. Press firmly, but gently, to seat the chassis.  
If you select Form A, the contact is open when power is removed from  
the control. If you select Form B, the contact closes when power is  
removed.  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
7.5  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarms  
Using Alarms  
Output 2, 3, and 4 of the Series 988 can function as alarms. This is  
accomplished with the [`Ot2], [`Ot3] or [`Ot4] prompt (Output Menu). If  
[`AL2], [`AL3] or [`AL4] is selected, the output is energized in the non-  
alarm condition and de-energizes the output in the alarm condition.  
Selecting [AL2n], [AL3n] or [AL4n] reverses this action: de-energizing the  
output in a non-alarm condition and energizing it in an alarm condition.  
If the L2, L3 or L4 LED on the front panel is lit, this indicates an alarm  
condition for output 2, 3 or 4 respectively.  
Once you’ve configured the outputs as alarms, enter the Output Menu  
again and select the [`AL2], [`AL3] or [`AL4] prompt. At these prompts  
you can select the type of alarm: process; deviation; or rate. Each may be  
independently set low and high. Choose between [`Pr1] (process alarm  
input 1), [`Pr2] (process alarm input 2), [`dE1] (deviation alarm input  
1), [`dE2] (deviation alarm input 2) or [rAtE] (rate alarm referenced to  
input 1).  
Example: [`Pr1] can reference the input 1 process value against the  
[A2LO] and [A2HI] settings, or [`Pr2] can reference the input 2 process  
value against the [A2LO] and [A2H1] settings.  
˜
NOTE:  
An alarm display  
will be masked by  
an error condition  
or when the control  
is in the Calibration  
or Setup menus.  
A process alarm sets an absolute temperature range or process value  
range. When the temperature or process leaves the range an alarm occurs.  
A process alarm is not tied to the set point.  
Example: If your set point is 100°F and a process alarm high limit is set  
to 150°F and the low limit is set to 50°F, the high limit trips at 150°F, and  
the low alarm at 50°F. If you change the set point, the process alarm lim-  
its remain the same.  
A deviation alarm alerts the operator when the process strays too far  
from the set point. The operator can enter independent high and low  
alarm settings. The reference for the deviation alarm is the set point. Any  
change in set point causes a corresponding shift in the deviation alarm.  
Low alarms are usually set at a negative deviation while high alarms are a  
positive deviation.  
Example: If your set point is 100°F, a deviation alarm high limit is set to  
+7°F and the low limit is set to -5°F, then the high alarm trips at 107°F,  
and the low alarm at 95°F. If you change the set point to 130°F, the  
alarms follow the set point and trip at 137°F and 125°F.  
7.6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarms  
A rate alarm alerts the operator when the process monitored by input 1 is  
increasing at a rate higher than the alarm high setting ( [A2HI], [A3HI] or  
[A4HI] ) or decreasing at a rate lower than the alarm alarm low setting  
( [A2LO], [A3LO] or [A4LO] ). The rate is sampled once a second.  
Alarms can be latching or non-latching. When the alarm condition is  
removed, a non-latching alarm automatically clears the alarm output and  
alarm message, if one is present. You must manually clear a latching  
alarm before it will disappear.  
The alarm output is indicated by the corresponding LED on the front  
panel: L2; L3; or L4. There may be an alarm message flashing in the lower  
display, but if the [`Anun] prompt is set to [`OFF] (Global Menu), no  
alarm message is displayed. When an alarm message is displayed, it alter-  
nately flashes with the current prompt at a one-second interval in the  
lower display.  
To clear a latching alarm, first correct the condition then press the  
Auto/Man key å once.  
Alarm silencing is available with all alarms. This function overrides the  
alarm on initial power up. On power up, the alarm message will not  
appear and the appropriate L2, L3 or L4 LED and output will reflect a  
non-alarm condition. Silencing is active until the process has entered the  
safe region located between the low- and high-alarm settings. Then devia-  
tion outside this safe zone triggers an alarm. If an alarm occurs at this  
point, the output can be silenced by pressing the Auto/Man key å once,  
but the controller still displays the alarm message.  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 7.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Error Codes  
Error Code E1 and E2 Messages  
Four dashes, [----], in the upper display indicate a Series 988 error. The  
control goes into the manual mode and maintains the percent output  
selected at the [FAIL] prompt (Global Menu). That value (percent of out-  
put) is shown in the lower display.  
˜
NOTE:  
To view the error  
code press the  
Auto/Man key å  
once. The upper dis-  
play shows the  
error code for five  
seconds before  
returning to the  
[----]display.  
[E1`1] [E2`1]: A/D underflow error  
The analog-to-digital (A/D) converter of the input indicated by the first  
number is under range. An open or reversed polarity sensor is the most  
likely cause. Check the sensor. Make sure the input prompt is set to the  
correct sensor.  
WATL  
W
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
A
Figure 7.8 -  
Error code display.  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
[E1`2] [E2`2]: Sensor under-range error  
The sensor at the input indicated by the first number generated a value  
lower than that allowed for the range of the sensor, or the analog-to-digital  
(A/D) converter malfunctioned. Make sure the setting for the input (Input  
Menu) matches the sensor type and that the sensor range falls within the  
range of the process being controlled.  
[E1`3] [E2`3]: Sensor over-range error  
The sensor at the input indicated by the first number generated a value  
higher than that allowed for the range of the sensor, or the analog-to-digi-  
tal (A/D) converter malfunctioned. Make sure the setting for the input  
(Input Menu) matches the sensor type and that the sensor range falls  
within the range of the process being controlled.  
˜
NOTE:  
An alarm display  
will be masked by  
an error condition  
or when the control  
is in the Calibration  
or Setup menus.  
[E1`4] [E2`4]: A/D overflow error  
The analog-to-digital (A/D) converter at the input indicated by the first  
number is over range. An open or reversed polarity sensor is the most like-  
ly cause. Check the sensor. Make sure the input (Input Menu) is set to the  
correct sensor type.  
The analog-to-digital (A/D) converter input voltage may be too high to con-  
vert an A/D signal.  
7.8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Codes  
[`Er3]: Ambient temperature error  
The ambient temperature of the Series 988 has dropped below 32°F/0°C  
or risen above 149°F/65°C. Calibration errors can also cause this error  
code. Try setting [`rSt] (Calibration Menu) to [`yES]. (Read about  
Factory Calibration in Chapter 6.)  
[`Er4]: RAM verification error  
An internal RAM failure has occurred. Contact the factory.  
[`Er5]: Non-volatile checksum error  
An EEPROM checksum error was detected. Turn the power off then back  
on again. If this does not clear the error, contact the factory.  
[OPLP]: Open-loop detect  
This error is not available while in the on/off mode. It is only active when  
[OPLP] is set to [``on] (Diagnostics Menu).  
[`Er9]: Configuration error  
An incorrect module has been installed in the control. Contact the factory.  
Error Code Actions  
All of the above error codes except [`Er4], [`Er5]and [`Er9]  
will result in these conditions:  
• If [FAIL]is set to [bPLS](Global Menu)…  
…and the control was in automatic operation when the error  
occurred, it goes into manual (% power) operation. If the output power  
is less than 75% ( 5%) power and there was a change in power (< 5%)  
within the last two minutes, the Series 988 switches to manual opera-  
tion at the last automatic power level (bumpless transfer). If the con-  
trol was in manual operation, it remains there. (Press the Auto/Man  
key å once to see the error code.) The error code is shown in the  
upper display for five seconds and the lower display shows the %  
power. After five seconds the upper display reverts to the [----] dis-  
play.  
• If the control was operating with stable output values when the error  
occurred, it continues to operate at those levels on a percent-power  
basis.  
• If output values were not stable, or the percent output was greater  
than 75%, the control outputs drop to 0% power (off).  
• If [FAIL] is not set to [bPLS]…  
… and the control was in automatic operation when the error  
occurred, it goes into manual (% power) operation. The power level is  
determined by the [FAIL] prompt value ([`=00] to [`100] percent).  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
7.9  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Codes  
To clear an error code…  
• If [`Err] is set to [`nLA], the error code should clear once the prob-  
lem is corrected.  
• If [`Err] is set to [`LAt], correct the problem and cycle power. You  
can also clear the error by pressing both the Up-arrow > and Down-  
arrow < keys to enter the Setup Menu, then press the Display key  
¥.  
Error codes [`Er4], [`Er5]and [`Er9]will result in these  
conditions:  
• The control is in automatic operation with both control outputs off.  
• The alarm outputs are in their alarm state (de-energized with the LED  
lit).  
• The lower display is blank.  
• The upper display indicates the error code.  
• All keys are inactive.  
• With [`Er5], all Setup Menu prompts return to default values.  
• The above conditions occur regardless of the [FAIL] value, or the set-  
tings in the Setup and Factory menus.  
˜
NOTE:  
An alarm display  
will be masked by  
an error condition  
or when the control  
is in the Calibration  
or Setup menus.  
Cycle power to the control. If the error is still present contact the factory.  
7.10 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuning, Manual Operation, Alarms and Error Codes, Chapter 7  
Chapter 8 General Software  
Burst Fire  
8.2  
Communications  
Dead Band  
8.4  
8.6  
Digital Events  
Heater Current  
Input Filter  
Input Linearization  
Ramp to Set Point  
Remote Set Point  
Retransmit  
8.8  
8.10  
8.12  
8.14  
8.16  
8.18  
8.20  
8.22  
Slidewire Feedback  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
8.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Burst Fire  
Requirements  
• This feature only works with zero-cross, solid-state devices. It will not  
function correctly with random-fire devices.  
• To enable burst fire the Series 988 must have an open collector or solid-  
state relay output: controllers with option “B,” “C” or “K” selected for  
output 1 (98_ _-_ _*_-_ _ _ _), output 2 (98_ _-_ _ _*-_ _ _ _), output 3 (98_  
_-_ _ _ _-*_ _ _) or output 4 (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_*_ _).  
ç
CAUTION:  
The burst fire fea-  
ture only func-  
tions with zero-  
cross, solid-state  
devices. It will not  
function correctly  
with random-fire  
devices. Verify  
that the output  
switching device  
is compatible  
• The time burst is appropriate for fast loads or very tight control. It pro-  
vides advantages only for PID control, not for on/off control.  
• The short time bases used by burst fire makes it incompatible with the  
heater current feature (98_ _-_4_ _-_ _ _ _). The heater current option  
requires a minimum of 300 milliseconds on time to get a reading.  
• The Series 988 has built in zero-cross detection circuitry, eliminating the  
need for external firing circuitry to trigger SCR’s. The controller will not  
allow burst fire to be selected if its zero-cross detection circuitry is not  
functioning.  
before selecting  
burst fire. Failure  
to follow this  
• The feature is enabled by selecting burst fire [brst] at the cycle time  
prompt for the appropriate output in the PID Menu — [Ct1A], [Ct1b],  
[Ct2a] or [Ct2b].  
guideline could  
result in damage  
to equipment.  
• Only the 988 and 989 can use the burst fire feature. The low-voltage  
units (986 and 987) cannot use burst firing.  
Overview  
Variable, time-base burst firing from the Series 988 provides the most  
even distribution of power with the lowest level of noise generation (RFI).  
An SSR or SCR firing card translates a command signal into a burst of ac  
cycles. The output is zero-cross fired, which always allows at least one full  
ac cycle to pass within the variable time base. Burst firing is the preferred  
mode to control resistive loads.  
The Series 988 detects when the ac sine wave of the load will cross the 0-  
volt point. It uses this information to switch the load on or off only at a 0-  
volt point, minimizing RFI.  
The burst fire time base in the Series 988 varies from a maximum 1.66-  
second time base (1-percent output; 1 cycle on, 99 off) down to a 33.3-mil-  
lisecond time base (50-percent output; 1 cycle on, 1 off). The graphs on  
the next page show how the time base varies with the percent output.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
100% output  
66% output  
10 on, 0 off  
2 on, 1 off  
10% output  
50% output  
1 on, 9 off  
1 on, 1 off  
Figure 8.3a - Sine  
waves of burst fire  
settings.  
Semiconductor Oven  
QPAC  
with  
QCD  
input  
WATL  
W
input 1  
output 1  
temperature  
sensor  
limit  
PROCESS  
limit  
sensor  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
heated platen  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
Figure 8.3b -  
Semiconductor  
oven with burst fire.  
Sample Application  
A Series 988 controls a heated platen in a semiconductor oven. Previously  
it used a power control requiring a 4-20mA signal to implement burst-fire  
control. We have replaced the power control with a Watlow Loyola QPAC  
with a QCD card that accepts a signal directly from an open-collector out-  
put of the Series 988. This gives smooth control at a lower overall system  
cost.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
8.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Communications  
Requirements  
Choose which interface your application will use: EIA/TIA-232 serial com-  
munications (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_R_ _), EIA/TIA-485 or EIA/TIA 232 serial com-  
munications (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_U_ _), or EIA/TIA-485 or EIA/TIA-422 serial  
communications (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_S_ _). The computer must have a compati-  
ble serial port or an appropriate converter must be used.  
Overview  
The serial communications feature allows the Series 988 family to receive  
commands from and transmit data to a master device, usually a comput-  
er. Any function that can be performed via the front panel, can also be  
accomplished using a serial communications port, allowing you to operate  
the controller from a computer and to store process data on a computer.  
L4 acts as the RX/TX indicator on the front display panel of the 988.  
The Series 988 is available with a choice of serial hardware interfaces. An  
EIA/TIA-232 interface allows for one master (computer) and one con-  
troller, with a maximum network length of 50 feet (15 meters).  
The EIA/TIA-485 or EIA/TIA-422 option equips the controller for a multi-  
drop interface: up to 32 total network devices with EIA/TIA-485 and up to  
10 total network devices with EIA/TIA-422. Each controller will have its  
own unique address. The total maximum network length is 4,000 feet  
(1,219 meters). All interfaces are isolated.  
To select between EIA/TIA-485 or EIA/TIA-422, enter the Setup Menus by  
holding the up-arrow > and down-arrow < keys simultaneously until  
setup [`SEt] appears in the bottom display. Use the up-arrow key to  
select the Communications Menu [COM]. At the interface prompt [Intf]  
select between [`422] or [`485].  
Other parameters that must be configured in the Communications Menu  
[COM] are the baud rate [bAUd], data bits and parity [data], protocol  
[Prot], and device address [Addr]. The protocol prompt must be set to  
full (ANSI X3.28 2.2-A3) or RTU Modbus if multiple devices are used with  
the EIA/TIA-485 or EIA/TIA-422 interface. If the full protocol or RTU  
Modbus is selected, a device address must be selected at the address  
prompt. For EIA/TIA-232, full [FULL] or on [``on] (XON/XOFF) protocol  
may be selected.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Test  
Test  
Test  
Test  
Test  
Chamber 1 Chamber 2  
Chamber 3  
Chamber 4  
Chamber 5  
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DEV  
DEV  
DEV  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
output 4  
output 4  
output 4  
output 4  
output 4  
personal  
computer  
with EIA/TIA-422 port  
Figure 8.5 - Test  
chambers with  
communications.  
Sample Application  
A test engineer uses Series 988s to control the temperatures of several  
automated test chambers. His computer is linked to the controllers  
through its EIA/TIA-422 serial communications port. His computer pro-  
gram monitors the temperatures of the chambers and initiates automatic  
test sequences when certain program parameters are met. After complet-  
ing a sequence, the computer loads the next temperature to the controller.  
The computer periodically interrogates each controller for its process tem-  
perature, set point and alarm status. This information is stored on a disk  
to provide test verification data for the completed products.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
8.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Dead Band  
Requirements  
The dead band feature is standard on any Series 988 controller with two  
control outputs. The dead band prompts will appear if the control outputs  
are configured for heat/cool or cool/heat.  
ç
WARNING:  
Overview  
If the dead band is  
set to a negative  
value, the heat  
and cool outputs  
can both be ON at  
the same time.  
The dead band prompts, [db`A] and [db`b], located in the PID menus,  
determine the amount of interaction between heat (reverse acting) and cool  
(direct acting) control outputs. The dead band directly offsets the target set  
point of the cool control output.  
With a positive dead band, both control outputs will never be ON at the  
same time. With the process in a positive dead band, the output value is  
determined by adding the percent heat output to the percent cool output  
and only applying the result to the correct output — cooling action if the  
sum is negative and heating action if it is positive.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
cool  
set point  
77°  
cooling action  
no action  
75  
[`SP1]  
+
2
=
77°  
(
)
[`dbA] cool set point  
2° deadband  
75°  
primary  
set point  
set point  
heating action  
Figure 8.7a -  
Dead band graph.  
Environmental Chamber  
WATL  
W
input 1  
output 1  
output 2  
chiller  
PROCESS  
temperature  
sensor  
limit  
sensor  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
limit  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
heater  
SERIES 988  
Figure 8.7b -  
Environmental  
chamber with dead  
band.  
Sample Application  
An engineer for an environmental chamber manufacturer, who is design-  
ing the heating and cooling system for a new chamber, wants to minimize  
the energy costs of operating the chamber. She has chosen the Series 988  
and will configure the heat and cool outputs with a positive dead band.  
When the chamber temperature is near ambient the cooling and heating  
systems had a tendency to buck one another, resulting in inefficient use of  
energy. The engineer started with a dead band of five degrees, but in the  
process of tuning the system for optimal control, the setting was reduced  
to two degrees. This made the chamber more energy efficient and reduced  
wear on the refrigeration system.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
8.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Digital Events  
Requirements  
A single digital event input is standard on all controls. A second digital  
input is available as an option for input 2 (98_ _-_5_ _-_ _ _ _).  
Overview  
The digital event input options on the Series 988 controller allow the oper-  
ator to select one of several software functions with the close of a cus-  
tomer-supplied switch or by a change in dc voltage (See Chapter 2 for volt-  
age and wiring information.).  
The list below outlines the functions that can be controlled with a digital  
event input:  
• Idle set point [IdSP] lets the operator select a second (idle) set point.  
• Turn control outputs off [`OFF] inhibits the control outputs.  
• Alarm reset [`ALr] resets alarms from a remote location.  
• Switch PID sets [`Pid] selects between PID set A or B (requires  
enhanced software, 98_B-_ _ _ _-_ _ _ _).  
• Remote set point [`rsp] switches to remote set points.  
• Front panel lockout [`LOC] locks out the front panel keys to prevent  
tampering.  
• Control output action [Actn] switches the control action of outputs 1  
and 2 from heating to cooling, or vice versa.  
• Auto/Manual operation [A-M] switches to the manual mode of opera-  
tion at the percent power selected with [FAIL] (Global Menu) and disables  
the Auto/Man key.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
WATL  
W
input 1  
output 1  
temperature  
sensor  
limit  
sensor  
limit  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
heater  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
switch  
input 3  
(event input 1)  
Figure 8.9 - Heater  
with digital event.  
Sample Application  
A manufacturing engineer is building an application that needs to switch  
to an idle temperature at the end of a batch and maintain that tempera-  
ture until the next batch is loaded, with minimum operator interaction.  
By connecting an external switch to the digital event input, he can select  
either the operating temperature or the idle temperature with the flip of a  
switch. The idle set point prompt is enabled by setting the Event Input 1  
prompt [`Ei1], in the Global Menu, to idle set point [Idsp]. The idle set  
point value is accessed by pressing the MODE key µ from anywhere in  
the display loop. When the switch closes, the lower display will indicate  
the idle set point, and the controller will maintain this new set point.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
8.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Heater Current  
Requirements  
Choose the heater current option (98_ _-_4_ _-_ _ _ _) for input 2 and an  
appropriate current transformer. A current transformer must be ordered  
separately.  
˜
Output 1 cannot be used as a process output. The heater current feature  
monitors only output 1.  
NOTE:  
To obtain a reading,  
the output ON-time  
must be a minimum  
of 0.3 seconds.  
Overview  
The heater current feature measures and responds to heater current in a  
system. This is an ideal method for detecting heater loss in applications  
with multiple heaters. The current is measured when output 1 is on. For  
instance, if a system has five, 10-amp heaters, the heater current input  
measures 50 amps regardless of the percent output.  
˜
NOTE:  
The heater current  
feature will not  
function with burst-  
fire outputs.  
To view the heater current press the DISPLAY key and advance to the  
Process 2 prompt [Pr`2]. The upper display indicates the last valid cur-  
rent reading.  
The Input 2 prompt [`In2] under the Input Menu [InPt] can be set to  
current [Curr] or loop error detect [LooP]. Current [Curr] allows you to  
monitor heater current and set alarm set points based on high and low  
heater current values. Alarms can only be configured as process alarms  
(see Alarms, in Chapter 7). Setting to loop error detect [LooP] enables  
monitoring and alarm functions, and also triggers an error and shuts off  
all outputs if current is present with output 1 off or when no current is  
present and output 1 power is more than zero.  
˜
NOTE:  
The heater current  
feature will not  
function when the  
Series 988 has a  
process output for  
output 1.  
There are limits associated with this feature:  
• To obtain a reading, the output on-time must be a minimum of 0.3 sec-  
onds. To calculate this, multiply the percent output by the cycle time set-  
ting. Example: With 30-percent output and a 2.0 second cycle time, the  
on-time would be: 0.30 x 2.0 = 0.6 seconds. This would yield a valid read-  
ing. If a valid reading is not possible, the 988 will display the last valid  
reading.  
• The heater current feature will not function with burst-fire outputs:  
Controllers with option “B,” “C” or “K” selected for output 1  
(98_ _-_ _*_-_ _ _ _), output 2 (98_ _-_ _ _*-_ _ _ _), output 3  
(98_ _-_ _ _ _-*_ _ _) or output 4 (98_ _-_ _ _ _-_*_ _). This does not neces-  
sarily apply to the loop error detect feature. If enabled, any current detect-  
ed with no output triggers an error.  
• This feature will not function when the Series 988 has a process output  
for output 1 (98_ _-F _ _ _-_ _ _ _). A known cycle time is required to detect  
the current. There is no cycle time associated with process outputs.  
The maximum signal the input can accept from the current transformer  
secondary is 50mA. So, you must calculate the output range of the cur-  
rent transformer before wiring the system.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.10 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
WATL  
W
Compression Molding Press  
input 1  
input 2  
output 1  
limit  
PROCESS  
current  
transformer  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
10A heaters  
SERIES 988  
limit  
sensor  
temperature  
sensor  
Figure 8.11 -  
Sample Application  
Compression mold-  
ing press using the  
heater current fea-  
ture.  
The Series 988 controls the lower platen of a compression molding press  
that contains five, 10-ampere heaters. A 50A:50mA current transformer is  
used to monitor heater current.  
Set the Input 2 prompt [`In2] to current [Curr], the Range Low 2 prompt  
[`rL2] to 0 and the Range High 2 prompt [`rH2] to 50. Find the range  
high 2 value with the following equation:  
range high 2 = (maximum CT primary current (load current)) x 50mA  
(maximum output from CT secondary (input))  
The application uses a Watlow current transformer (CT) part# 16-0233,  
which has a maximum input of 50 amperes, which corresponds to a maxi-  
mum output of 50mA.  
range high 2 = (50Amps) x 50mA  
50mA  
Solving for rH2 gives you 50. This is the range high 2 setting.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 8.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Input Filter  
Requirements  
This feature is standard on all Series 988 controllers.  
Overview  
In certain applications the process being measured can be unstable,  
which makes it difficult to control and also makes the constantly changing  
display difficult to read. The Series 988 input filter can solve these prob-  
lems by smoothing out just the display or the display and the input signal.  
NOTE:  
Use this feature  
with caution,  
because a large  
time constant could  
hide system  
upsets.  
You can set a time constant in seconds for a low-pass filter that will, if you  
select a positive value, affect the display only. Select a negative value to fil-  
ter the input signal itself.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.12 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Display readings with input filter ON  
Display readings with input filter OFF  
time  
time  
Figure 8.13a -  
Display readings  
with input filtering.  
Humidity Chamber  
WATL  
W
input 1  
output 1  
limit  
sensor  
limit  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
humitidy  
MODE  
transmitter  
heater  
SERIES 988  
Figure 8.13b -  
Humidity chamber  
with input filtering.  
Sample Application  
A Series 988 controls the humidity in an environmental chamber. The rel-  
ative humidity (RH) sensor provides a 4-20mA signal over a 0-100% RH  
range. The sensor is very sensitive to changes caused by air flow in the  
chamber. The turbulence in the chamber makes the controller display  
jump two to three percent. To remove this display dithering set the filter  
time constant [Ftr1] for input 1 to two seconds. This will smooth the dis-  
play and provide a more realistic reading.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 8.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Input Linearization  
Requirements  
The square root extraction feature is standard on any Series 988 con-  
troller with universal signal conditioner inputs. The linearization prompt  
will appear if a process input is selected with the DIP switches (see  
Chapter 1).  
Overview  
In many flow applications the output signal from a flow transmitter repre-  
sents a squared value of the actual flow. The square root must be extract-  
ed from the signal to make it useful to the operator. Many flow transmit-  
ters offer this feature in the transmitter itself, but this can add significant-  
ly to the cost. Using the square root extraction option in the Series 988  
controller can save the operator money. The feature is enabled simply by  
setting input 1 linearization [lin1] or input 2 linearization [lin2] to  
square root extraction [root].  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.14 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
O
O
O
linearized signal  
O
flow in  
gallons per  
minute  
O
O
O
6
non-linearized signal  
O
4
O
O
O
O
2
O
8
O
O
6
0
O
O
4
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Figure 8.15a -  
Graph of linearized  
signal.  
4-20mA input signal  
WATL  
W
input 1  
output 1  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
flow  
transmitter  
Water Treatment Pond  
Figure 8.15b -  
Sample Application  
Waste-water treat-  
ment with input lin-  
earization.  
A waste water process engineer needs to control the flow of a solution to  
be mixed with wastewater to treat it. The transmitter provides a 4-20mA  
output without square root extraction. The engineer used the Series 988  
with a universal signal conditioner input and a 4-20mA process output to  
control the flow. The input signal was linearized using the square root  
extraction feature of the 988.  
The above system has a flow range of 0 to 16 gallons per minute. The  
range low and range high parameters for input 1 would be set to 0 and 16  
respectively. The input 1 linearization prompt [lin1] would then be set to  
square root extraction [root]. You can see from the above graph that  
without square root extraction to linearize the signal it would not be use-  
ful for controlling the process.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 8.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Ramp To Set Point  
Requirements  
This feature is standard on all units.  
Overview  
Ramp to set point enables the Series 988 to ramp the set point at a user-  
defined rate. This allows the controller to start up a system or change  
between set points at a rate that will not stress the product or system  
components. The ramp rate is defined in degrees per minute. Ramp to set  
point can be initiated at start up only, or at start up and also on any set  
point changes.  
When a ramp is initiated, the starting point for the ramp is the current  
process value. If the ramp is initiated on start up, the Series 988 looks at  
the process value upon power up, and uses that value as the starting  
point for the ramp. If a set point change initiates the ramp to set point  
function, the controller looks at the process value when the change is  
made and uses that value as the starting point for the ramp. If the set  
point is changed during a ramp, the process value at the time of the  
change becomes the starting point for the new ramp.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.16 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
heaters  
Muffle Furnace  
WATL  
W
input 1  
output 1  
limit  
sensor  
limit  
PROCESS  
temperature  
sensor  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
heaters  
SERIES 988  
Figure 8.17 -  
Muffle furnace with  
ramp to set point.  
Sample Application  
An engineer needs to control the temperature of a muffle furnace. The fur-  
nace set point must be ramped up at a defined rate to prevent stressing  
the muffle and other system components. By enabling the ramp to set  
point function in the Series 988, the engineer can control the rate at  
which the set point will rise. Ramp to set point is enabled in the Global  
Menu using the Ramping Function prompt [``rp]. To ramp on start up  
only, select start [Strt]. To ramp on start up and on any set point  
changes, select set point [StPt]. The ramp rate [rate] is in degrees per  
minute.  
For further protection of the system, output 2, 3 or 4 can be configured as  
a rate alarm, monitoring the rate of increase or decrease in the process  
variable on input 1. The Alarm Low [A2LO] and Alarm High [A2HI]  
prompts (The “2” in these examples refers to output 2.) establish the  
ramp-down and ramp-up rate set points, respectively, in degrees per  
minute.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 8.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Remote Set Point  
Requirements  
Input 2 must be either a thermocouple (98_ _-_1_ _-_ _ _ _ ) or universal  
signal conditioner (98_ _-_2_ _-_ _ _ _).  
NOTE:  
Make sure all input  
and output  
impedances are  
compatible.  
To use a Series 988 as a master controller, choose one of the retransmit  
options for output 3 of the master (98_ _-_ _ _ _-M_ _ _ for 0-20mA or 4-  
20mA; or 98_ _-_ _ _ _-N_ _ _ for 0-5VÎ (dc), 1-5VÎ or 0-10VÎ).  
Overview  
The remote set point feature allows the Series 988 to use a thermocouple,  
RTD or process signal at input 2 to establish the set point. This feature  
gives the Series 988 the ability to have its set point value manipulated by  
an external source. A common application would use one ramping con-  
troller with a set-point retransmit output to ramp multiple controllers  
using the remote set point. Or you could use an analog output from a PLC  
to send set point values to a Series 988.  
NOTE:  
Input 1 and 2 are not  
isolated from each  
other.  
You may select between local and remote set points at the front panel,  
with an event input, from a remote computer using the communicatons  
feature or from an external switch using an event input.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.18 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
zone 1  
zone 2  
zone 3  
zone 4  
zone 5  
zone 6  
zone 7  
zone 8  
Master  
WATL  
W
PROCESS  
Remote  
Remote  
Remote  
Remote  
Remote  
Remote  
Remote  
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
WATL  
W
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
PROCESS  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DEV  
DEV  
DEV  
DEV  
DEV  
DEV  
SERIES 988  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
SERIES 988  
output 3  
input 2  
input 2  
input 2  
input 2  
input 2  
input 2  
input 2  
Figure 8.19 -  
Zone heating with  
remote set point.  
Sample Application  
An engineer has a machine with eight independent zones of heat. He  
wants to change set points on all zones without having to adjust each con-  
trol individually. This can be achieved using a Series 988 with a 0-5VÎ  
(dc) retransmit output as the master controller. The seven remote 988s  
will use the 0-5VÎ (dc) signal on input 2 as a remote set point. When the  
set point is changed on the master controller, the retransmit output  
changes the set points of the seven remote controllers. By enabling the  
ramp to set point feature in the master controller, all eight zones are  
ramped up to set point at a user-defined rate on power up.  
The retransmit output from the master Series 988 is set so that 0VÎ (dc)  
represents 0°F and 5VÎ (dc) represents 800°F. On the remote controllers,  
set the input 2 DIP switch to the position for the 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ (dc)  
process input. In the Input Menu, under the Input 2 prompt [`In2],  
select 0-5. The Remote Set Point prompt [`rsp] should be set to ON  
[``on] and decimal 2 [deC2] set to 0. The range low 2 [`rL2] and the  
range high 2 [`rH2] parameters will establish the scaling for the remote  
set point input. Range low 2 [`rL2] should be set to 0 and range high 2  
[`rH2] should be set to 800. To operate a specific zone ten degrees hotter  
than the others, increase the range low 2 [`rL2] to 10 and the range high  
2 [`rH2] to 810.  
With remote set point [`rSP] enabled and local [```L] selected under the  
Local-remote prompt [`L-r] in the System Menu, the set point is adjusted  
using the up-arrow and down-arrow keys. Selecting remote [```r] under  
the Local-remote prompt [`L-r], disables the up-arrow and down-arrow  
keys, allowing the set point value to be manipulated by the input 2 signal.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 8.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Retransmit  
Requirements  
Output 3 is used for the retransmit option. Choose either a milliamp (98_  
_-_ _ _ _-M_ _ _) or a voltage (98_ _-_ _ _ _-N_ _ _) signal. Select the output  
range in the Output Menu.  
Overview  
The retransmit feature can be used to transmit an analog signal repre-  
senting the value of either input process variable or the target set point  
variable. The retransmit signal is factory configured as either a milliamp  
(98_ _-_ _ _ _-M_ _ _) or a voltage (98_ _-_ _ _ _-N_ _ _) signal. In choosing  
the type of retransmit signal the operator must take into account the  
input impedance of the device to be retransmitted to and the required sig-  
nal type, either voltage or milliamps.  
NOTE:  
Enhanced software  
is not required for  
this feature.  
Typically applications might use the retransmit option to record one of the  
variables with a chart recorder or to generate a set point for other controls  
in a multi-zone application (see page 8.19).  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.20 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Heat-treat Oven  
WATL  
W
input 1  
output 1  
output 3  
temperature  
sensor  
limit  
PROCESS  
limit  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
sensor  
heaters  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
Chart  
Recorder  
Figure 8.21 -  
Heat-treat oven with  
retransmit.  
Sample Applications  
A Series 988 is being used to control the temperature of a heat-treat oven.  
The temperature of the process must be recorded on a chart recorder. The  
oven temperature range stays between 600° and 900° F. The chart  
recorder requires a 4-20mA signal.  
In the Output Menu [OtPt] set analog output [Aout] to [Prc1] to tag the  
input 1 process value as the parameter to be retransmitted. Set retransmit  
low limit [`ArL] to 600 to set the low range for the retransmit signal to  
600. Set retransmit high limit [`ArH] to 900 to set the high range for the  
retransmit signal to 900. Set retransmit calibrate offset [ACAL] to 0,  
assuming there is no calibration offset required.  
The retransmit output will be 4mA until the oven temperature is greater  
than 600 degrees F, at which point the signal will increase with tempera-  
ture to 20mA at 900° F and will not exceed 20mA.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 8.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Slidewire Feedback  
Requirements  
A slidewire configuration uses at least two inputs and two control out-  
puts. Input 2 can only be selected as a slidewire input (98_ _-_3_ _-_ _ _ _).  
NOTE:  
Outputs must be  
compatible with the  
slidewire valve actu-  
ators.  
Overview  
The Series 988 can control the position of a valve with a slidewire feed-  
back position indicator. The controller senses the resistance of the  
slidewire and compares it to the range low and range high settings to  
determine the valve position. The controller compares this to the percent  
output and takes action to match the two by opening or closing the valve.  
Set the hunt [hunt] parameter to limit valve hunting. The value is set for  
the percent of output (0.0 to 100.0). When the valve is within this dead  
band, a change in output greater than half the hunt parameter is required  
to trigger action. Output 1 responds to “close” commands and output 2  
responds to “open” commands.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
8.22 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Software  
Gas-fired Furnace  
Valve Actuator  
W
ATL  
W
input 1  
input 2  
output 1 (close)  
output 2 (open)  
temperature  
sensor  
limit  
PROCESS  
limit  
sensor  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
gas  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
flow  
gas valve  
cut-off  
valve  
slidewire input  
Figure 8.23 -  
Sample Application  
Gas-fired furnace  
with slidewire feed-  
back.  
A Series 988 controls the gas valve for a gas-fired furnace to heat treat  
large metal parts. First the controller must be “married” to the slidewire  
feedback from the valve actuator. To do this, first set the Input 2 prompt  
[`In2] to slidewire [Slid]. Advance to the Learn Low Resistance prompt  
[LrnL]. Close the valve manually to the minimum resistance reading from  
the slidewire. Select [`yes] in the upper display and press the Mode key  
µ to advance to the Learn High Resistance prompt [LrnH]. Manually  
open the valve (maximum slidewire resistance). Select [`YES] in the upper  
display and press the Mode key µ. At this point both the high and low  
resistance values have been learned and stored in the range low 2 and  
range high 2 parameters.  
You can also manually set the range low and range high values. From the  
slidewire specifications, determine the low and high resistance values and  
enter these at the Range Low [`rL2] and Range High [`rH2] prompts.  
Once the control is operating, adjust the hunt [hunt] parameter, to mini-  
mize valve oscillations. The hunt parameter sets up a dead band on both  
sides of the current valve position. The desired valve position is then com-  
pared to the actual position. If the difference is greater than the one-half of  
the hunt value, the Series 988 repositions the valve to achieve the temper-  
ature set point. Once repositioning is complete, the dead band is recalcu-  
lated for the new valve position.  
General Software Features, Chapter 8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 8.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9 Enhanced Software  
Cascade  
Differential  
Dual PID  
Duplex  
9.2  
9.6  
9.8  
9.10  
9.12  
Ratio  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
9.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
Cascade  
Requirements  
Cascade control requires enhanced software and two analog inputs, input  
1 to monitor the primary, or outer, loop and input 2 to monitor the sec-  
ondary, or inner, loop. At least one control output is required to control  
the process.  
Overview  
Cascade control can handle a difficult process with minimal overshoot,  
while reaching the set point quickly. This minimizes damage to system  
components and allows for oversizing heaters for optimal heat-up rates.  
Heater life is also extended by reducing thermal cycling of the heater.  
Systems with long lag times between the energy source (heater, steam,  
etc.) and the measured process value cannot be controlled accurately or  
efficiently with a single control loop, because a lot of energy can build up  
before a response is detected. This  
can cause the system to overshoot  
the set point, which could damage  
the heater, product or heat transfer  
medium, such as a heat transfer  
fluid.  
This graph illustrates a system with  
a long lag time. Curve A represents  
a single-control system with PID  
parameters that allow a maximum  
heat-up rate. Too much energy is  
introduced and the set point is over-  
Figure 9.2a - System  
heat-up profiles  
using three different  
control methods.  
shot. In most long-lag-time systems the process value may never settle out  
to an acceptable error. Curve C represents a single-control system tuned  
to minimize overshoot. This results in unacceptable heat-up rates, with  
the final value taking hours to reach. Curve B shows a cascade system  
that limits the energy  
introduced into the sys-  
Two controllers in one  
tem, allowing an opti-  
mal heat-up rate with  
minimal overshoot.  
output 1  
% out  
input 1  
input 2  
In2  
In1  
SP  
Figure 9.2b - The  
cascade feature  
allows one Series  
988 controller to  
internalize the func-  
tions of two con-  
trollers.  
SPint  
% int  
This drawing shows two  
controllers configured  
as a cascade system.  
The second controller  
generates the internal  
set point. The Series  
Outer-loop  
Controller  
Inner-loop  
Controller  
988 effectively combines both controllers into a single package.  
The primary controller measures the process in the outer, or primary, loop  
with input 1 and compares the value to the desired set point. The differ-  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
9.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
ence between the set point and the process temperature generates an  
internal percent output value for the second, or inner loop, controller. This  
value cannot be seen by the operator. This internal percent (% int) output  
generates the internal set point for the secondary, or inner loop. The sec-  
ondary loop uses this set point and the value of input 2 (typically attached  
to the heater sheath) to control the heat source temperature.  
Algorithm  
The following formulas show how the primary control sends a set point  
(based on input 2 range-high and range-low values) to the secondary con-  
trol. The secondary control uses this set point (SP int) to generate a per-  
cent output (% out) to the heater.  
1.) %  
int  
= PID Set A [In1 - SP]  
2.) SP  
= (rH2 - rL2) * %  
int  
+ rL2  
int  
3.) %  
= PID Set B [In2 - SP  
]
out  
int  
The critical parameters are the range settings for input 2 of the inner loop  
controller. The range-high value (rH2) is the maximum allowed set point  
for the secondary, or inner, loop. The range-low value (rL2) is the mini-  
mum allowed set point. In a system controlling a heater this would be the  
maximum and minimum desired sheath temperatures of the heater.  
Typically the range-low term is set below the ambient temperature.  
Otherwise the system could never fully cool down.  
Setup  
When tuning a cascade system, the inner loop must be tuned first. In a  
heating system the inner loop is comprised of the output device and the  
input 2 sensor, which usually measures the heater sheath temperature.  
The output device controls a power switching device, which, in turn  
switches the heater. The set point for the inner loop is generated by the  
outer loop and will have a range between range low 2 [`rL2] and range  
high 2 [`rH2].  
Before tuning the inner loop you must make sure [`rL2] and [`rH2] are  
set properly. Set the value of [`rL2] slightly lower than the ambient tem-  
perature, otherwise the system will never fully cool down. Set [`rH2] to  
the maximum desired heat source temperature. The inner loop can be  
auto-tuned by setting [`AUt] to [Pidb]. While auto-tuning, the inner loop  
will be controlled in an ON/OFF mode at a set point equal to [AtSP] x  
[`rH2].  
Once the inner loop, PID B, has completed auto-tuning, we can then auto-  
tune the outer loop, PID A. The outer loop will generate the set point for  
the inner loop. This is done by comparing the value of the input 1 sensor  
to the process set point, performing the control algorithm by using the val-  
ues of [PidA], then generating a set point between [`rL2] and [`rH2].  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
9.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
The outer loop can be auto-tuned by setting [`AUt] to [PidA]. While auto-  
tuning, the outer loop will be controlled in an on/off mode at a set point  
equal to [AtSP] x [`SP1]. In a heating application, make sure the set  
point is set at a value above ambient temperature. In most cases, the  
auto-tuning feature will tune [PidA] for acceptable control. If not, you  
must then manually tune the outer loop.  
Before beginning manual tuning, record the values of [Pb1A] and [rE1A]  
generated by the auto-tuning feature. The auto-tune for the outer loop will  
not generate a value for [rA1A], because rate (derivative) in the outer loop  
seems to cause instability in most systems.  
Start manual tuning by setting [rE1A] to [`)00]. Enter the desired  
process set point and let the system stabilize. Once the system stabilizes,  
observe the value of [`Pr2] in the Display Menu. If the [`Pr2] value fluc-  
tuates, make the proportional band setting [Pb1A] wider until the [`Pr2]  
value stabilizes. Make adjustment [Pb1A] in 5° to 10° increments, allowing  
time between adjustments for the system to stabilize.  
Once [`Pr2] has stabilized, observe percent power in the display loop. It  
should be stable, 10%. At this point, the process temperature should also  
be stable, but will exhibit droop (stabilized below set point). The droop can  
be eliminated with reset of integral.  
Start with a setting of 0.01; allow 10 minutes for the process temperature  
to come up to set point. If it has not, increase the setting to 0.05 and wait  
another 10 minutes. After this, double the reset setting until process value  
equals the set point. If the process becomes unstable, the reset value is  
too large. Decrease the setting until the process stabilizes.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
9.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
outer-loop  
thermocouple  
W
ATL  
W
oil in  
oil out  
input 1  
input 2  
output 1  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
inner-loop  
thermocouple  
SERIES 988  
heater  
limit  
limit sensor  
Lube Oil Tank  
Figure 9.5 - Lube oil  
tank with cascade  
control.  
Sample Application  
A Series 988 controller is used to heat lube oil to 125°F with a screw-plug-  
style heater. To protect the oil from breaking down and maximize its life, it  
is desirable to limit the maximum heater sheath temperature to 250° F.  
The Series 988 is ordered with two thermocouple inputs. Input 2, the  
inner loop in the cascade configuration, measures the heater sheath.  
Input 1, the outer loop, measures the lube oil temperature before it leaves  
the tank. The external set point is 125°. By setting range high 2 [`rH2] to  
250° the set point for the heater sheath will be limited, thus extending the  
lube oil life.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
9.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
Differential  
Requirements  
Two inputs and the enhanced software option are required.  
Overview  
Differential control allows the Series 988 to control one process at a differ-  
ence to another process. Input 2 acts as a remote set point input. However  
the displayed set point indicates the desired difference between input 1  
and input 2. The set point that input 1 will use is determined by the equa-  
tion:  
internal set point = input 2 + differential set point  
The lower display shows the differential set point, which can be adjusted  
with the increment (up-arrow) and decrement (down-arrow) keys.  
Please note that while in the differential control mode the internal set  
point for input 1 cannot be viewed and must be calculated with the equa-  
tion.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
9.6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
Water Boiler  
WATL  
W
outside  
temperature  
sensor  
input 1  
input 2  
output 1  
limit  
PROCESS  
temperature  
sensor  
limit  
sensor  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
heating element  
Figure 9.7 - Water  
boiler with differen-  
tial control.  
Sample Application  
The most common application using differential control is to maintain  
water temperature in a boiler at a differential to the outside air tempera-  
ture. A thermocouple at input 2 senses the outside air temperature and  
adjusts the internal set point to maintain the boiler water temperature  
120 degrees higher. Substituting values we have: boiler temperature =  
outside temperature + 120°.  
In this application the system uses two type J thermocouples: one to  
sense boiler water temperature (input 1) and one to sense the outside air  
temperature (input 2).  
To configure the controller, first enable input 2 (set [`In2] to [```J] ). To  
enable the differential control algorithm set the control prompt [CntL] in  
the Global Menu to differential [diFF]. Press the DISPLAY key. The lower  
display will read 0, indicating no differential between input 1 and input 2.  
Adjust the set point to 120. The internal set point for input 1 is now equal  
to the input 2 value plus 120, which will maintain the boiler water tem-  
perature 120 degrees higher than the outside air temperature.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
9.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
Dual PID Sets  
Requirements  
The Series 988 controller needs the enhanced software option to use dual  
PID sets.  
Overview  
Standard software units have a single set of PID parameters. Units with  
enhanced software can use two independent sets of heat/cool PID para-  
meters, PID A [PidA] and PID B [Pidb]. To enable dual PID, enter the  
Global Menu and set the algorithm prompt [ALgO] to dual PID [Pid2].  
This second set of PID parameters enables the controller to switch  
between two sets of PIDs, to compensate for changes in the system char-  
acteristics. This need can arise from a variety of circumstances, such as  
significant set point changes (controlling at 250, then controlling at 750),  
operating a furnace with half a load versus a full load of steel, changing  
the speed of a conveyor through a curing oven or using different materials  
in an extruder.  
Series 988 controllers can be configured to switch between PID A and PID B  
based on a process value, a set point value or the event input status.  
• At [Pid2] PID 2 Crossover Selection (Global Menu) select what will  
cause the switch:  
• [Proc] Crossover Process Value, (input 1), PIDs will switch  
based on the crossover process value;  
• [StPt] Crossover Set Point (1) Value, PIDs will switch at the  
crossover set point value, PID A used below the crossover  
point and PID B above;  
• [``no] no crossover.  
• At [`Ei1] Event Input 1 or [`Ei2] Event Input 2 select [`Pid]:  
• PID A is used when the event input switch is open;  
• PID B when the event input switch is closed.  
(Note: One event input is standard on all units, a second event input is an  
option.)  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
9.8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
Test Chamber  
chiller  
WATL  
W
input 1  
input 2  
output 1  
output 2  
temperature  
sensor  
PROCESS  
limit  
sensor  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
limit  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
pressure  
AUTO  
MAN  
switch  
MODE  
heater  
SERIES 988  
Figure 9.9 - Test  
chamber controlled  
with dual PID sets.  
Sample Application  
A test engineer needs to control the temperature in a test chamber that  
can be operated at normal atmosphere or under vacuum conditions. If he  
tunes the controller for normal atmospheric conditions, when he reaches  
the portion of his test that requires a vacuum, he must stop the test and  
enter new PID parameters to maintain stable temperatures. The system  
characteristics are so very different, that one set of PIDs will not give satis-  
factory results under both normal and vacuum conditions.  
The Series 988 solves this problem with the dual PID option. Auto-tuning  
PID A under normal atmospheric conditions, then auto-tuning PID B  
under vacuum conditions, establishes PID values for two sets of system  
characteristics. A pressure switch connected to the event input tells the  
controller when to switch between PID A and PID B, eliminating the need  
to change PID values manually.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
9.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
Duplex  
Requirements  
The duplex control feature requires enhanced software and a process out-  
put.  
NOTE:  
Overview  
Duplex applications  
require a special  
valve.  
Certain systems require that a single process output control both heating  
and cooling outputs. A Series 988 controller configured with enhanced  
software and a process output can function as two separate outputs. With  
a 4 to 20mA output the heating output will operate from 12 to 20mA (0 to  
+100 percent) and the cooling output will operate from 12 to 4mA (0 to -  
100 percent). In some cases this type of output is required by the device  
that the 988 controls, such as a three-way valve that opens one way with  
a 12 to 20mA signal and opens the other way with a 4 to 12mA signal.  
This feature reduces the overall system cost by using a single output to  
act as two outputs.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
9.10 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
Fluid Sample Container  
WATL  
W
input 1  
output 1  
hot water  
PROCESS  
temperature  
transmitter  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
%
OUT  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
SERIES 988  
cold water  
Figure 9.11 - Fluid  
sample container  
Sample Application  
The system outlined above uses a three-way valve for heating and cooling  
a fluid sample. Coils surround the container holding the fluid. When the  
temperature needs to be raised, the signal to the valve will be between 12  
and 20mA, sending hot water through the coils. When cooling is required,  
the signal will be between 12 and 4mA, sending cold water through the  
coils.  
with duplex control.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 9.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
Ratio  
Requirements  
Ratio control requires enhanced software. Two analog inputs are required  
to monitor the process, and at least one output adjusts the controlled part  
of the process.  
Overview  
This feature allows the Series 988 to control one process as a ratio of  
another process. This is especially useful in applications that mix two  
materials, whether steam, paint or food ingredients.  
Input 2 of the controller measures the part of the process that is either  
uncontrolled or controlled by another device. The part of the process con-  
trolled by the 988 will be maintained at a level equal to the quantity mea-  
sured at input 2 multiplied by the ratio term set by the user. Input 1 mon-  
itors the controlled part of the process.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
9.12 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhanced Software  
WATL  
W
input 1  
input 2  
output 1  
mixed paint  
PROCESS  
L1 L2 L3 L4  
DEV  
DISPLAY  
flow  
transmitter  
%
OUT  
flow  
transmitter  
controlled flow  
of pigment  
AUTO  
MAN  
MODE  
Mixing Tank  
SERIES 988  
uncontrolled  
flow of  
unmixed paint  
motorized  
valve  
Figure 9.13 - Mixing  
tank with ratio con-  
trol.  
Sample Application  
Blue pigment must be added to paint at a ratio of one part per 100 to cre-  
ate a mixed paint of the desired color. The uncolored paint flows into the  
mixer in an uncontrolled stream that is set manually and sensed by input  
2. A motorized valve controls the flow of pigment, which is monitored by  
the flow sensor to input 1. The flow rate of the uncolored paint determines  
the set point for the motorized valve that controls the pigment flow. If an  
operator needs to change the rate of flow for the uncolored paint, the set  
point will shift accordingly to maintain the correct ratio in the mixing  
tank.  
The application engineer set up this feature in software by choosing ratio  
[rAti] as the control [CntL] parameter in the Global Menu. The set point  
value displayed was then a ratio value. He entered 0.01 to maintain an  
input 1:input 2 ratio of 1:100.  
Enhanced Software Features, Chapter 9  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual 9.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Glossary  
A.2  
Specifications  
Warranty and Returns  
Index  
A.4  
A.5  
A.6  
Menu Overview  
Model Number  
Declaration of Conformity  
A.10  
A.11  
A.12  
Appendix  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
A.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary, A - L  
(RC) filter.  
digital adaptive filter — A filter that rejects high  
frequency input signal noise (noise spikes).  
annunciator — A visual display that uses pilot lights to  
indicate the former or existing condition of several items in  
a system.  
heat/cool output filter — A filter that slows the  
change in the response of the heat or cool output. The out-  
put responds to a step change by going to approximately  
2/3 its final value within the number of scans that are set.  
bumpless transfer — A smooth transition from auto  
(closed loop) to manual (open loop) operation. The control  
output(s) does not change during the transfer.  
form A — A single-pole, single-throw relay that uses only  
the normally open (NO) and common contacts. These con-  
tacts close when the relay coil is energized. They open  
when power is removed from the coil.  
burst fire — A power control method that repeatedly turns  
on and off full ac cycles. Also called zero-cross fire, it  
switches close to the zero-voltage point of the ac sine wave.  
Variable-time-base burst fire selectively holds or transits  
ac cycles to achieve the desired power level.  
form B — A single-pole, single-throw relay that uses only  
the normally closed (NC) and common contacts. These  
contacts open when the relay coil is energized. They close  
when power is removed from the coil.  
calibration offset — An adjustment to eliminate the dif-  
ference between the indicated value and the actual process  
value.  
form C — A single-pole, double-throw relay that uses the  
normally open (NO), normally closed (NC) and common  
contacts. The operator can choose to wire for a Form A or  
Form B contact.  
cascade — Control algorithm in which the output of one  
control loop provides the set point for another loop. The  
second loop, in turn, determines the control action.  
closed loop — A control system that uses a sensor to  
measure a process variable and makes decisions based on  
that feedback.  
hunting — Oscillation of process temperature between the  
set point and the process variable.  
hysteresis — A change in the process variable required to  
re-energize the control or alarm output. Sometimes called  
switching differential.  
cold junction — See junction, cold.  
cold junction compensation — Electronic means to com-  
pensate for the effective temperature at the cold junction.  
integral — Control action that automatically eliminates  
offset, or droop, between set point and actual process tem-  
perature. See reset, automatic.  
current transformer — A transformer designed for mea-  
suring electrical current.  
isolation — Electrical separation of sensor from high volt-  
age circuitry. Allows use of grounded or ungrounded sens-  
ing element.  
dead band — The range through which a variation of the  
input produces no noticeable change in the output. In the  
dead band, specific conditions can be placed on control  
output actions. Operators select the dead band. It is usu-  
ally above the heating proportional band and below the  
cooling proportional band.  
Joint Industrial Standards (JIS) — A Japanese agency  
that establishes and maintains standards for equipment  
and components. Also known as JISC (Japanese Industrial  
Standards Committee), its function is similar to Germany’s  
Deutsche Industrial Norm (DIN).  
default parameters — The programmed instructions that  
are permanently stored in the microprocessor software.  
JIS — Joint Industrial Standards.  
derivative — The rate of change in a process variable.  
Also known as rate. See PID.  
junction — The point where two dissimilar metal conduc-  
tors join to form a thermocouple.  
cold junction — Connection point between ther-  
mocouple metals and the electronic instrument. See refer-  
ence junction.  
Deutsche Industrial Norm (DIN) — A set of technical, sci-  
entific and dimensional standards developed in Germany.  
Many DIN standards have worldwide recognition.  
grounded junction — Type of thermocouple  
probe in which the hot, or measuring junction, is an inte-  
gral part of the sheath material. No electrical isolation is  
provided.  
DIN — See Deutsche Industrial Norm.  
droop — In proportional controllers, the difference  
between set point and actual value after the system stabi-  
lizes.  
isolated junction — A form of thermocouple  
probe construction in which the measuring junction is  
fully enclosed in a protective sheath and electrically isolat-  
ed from it. Commonly called an ungrounded junction.  
reference junction — The junction in a thermo-  
couple circuit held at a stable, known temperature (cold  
junction). Standard reference temperature is 32°F (0°C).  
thermocouple junction — The point where the  
two dissimilar metal conductors join. In a typical thermo-  
couple circuit, there is a measuring junction and a refer-  
ence junction. See reference junction.  
duty cycle — The percentage of a cycle time in which the  
output is on.  
external signal conditioner power supply — A dc voltage  
source that powers external devices.  
filter —  
digital filter (DF) — A filter that slows the  
response of a system when inputs change unrealistically  
or too fast. Equivalent to a standard resistor-capacitor  
ungrounded junction — See isolated junction.  
Appendix  
A.2  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary, M - Z  
linearization, square root — The extraction of a linear  
signal from a nonlinear signal corresponding to the mea-  
sured flow from a flow transmitter. Also called square root  
extraction.  
perature. Also see integral.  
automatic reset — The integral function of a PI  
or PID temperature controller that adjusts the process  
temperature to the set point after the system stabilizes.  
The inverse of integral.  
Modbus (RTU) — Remote Terminal Unit.  
automatic power reset — A feature in latching  
limit controls that does not recognize power outage as a  
limit condition. When power is restored, the output is re-  
energized automatically, as long as the temperature is  
within limits.  
NEMA 4X — A NEMA specification for determining resis-  
tance to moisture infiltration. This rating certifies the con-  
troller as washable and corrosion resistant.  
manual reset — 1) A feature on a limit control  
that requires human intervention to return the limit to  
normal operation after a limit condition has occurred. 2)  
The adjustment of a proportional control to raise the pro-  
portional band to compensate for droop.  
on/off — A method of control that turns the output full on  
until set point is reached, and then off until the process  
error exceeds the hysteresis.  
open loop — A control system with no sensory feedback.  
no key reset — A method for resetting the con-  
troller’s memory (for instance, after an EPROM change).  
output — Control signal action in response to the differ-  
ence between set point and process variable.  
resistance temperature detector (RTD) — A sensor that  
uses the resistance temperature characteristic to measure  
temperature. There are two basic types of RTDs: the wire  
RTD, which is usually made of platinum, and the thermis-  
tor, which is made of a semiconductor material. The wire  
RTD is a positive temperature coefficient sensor only,  
while the thermistor can have either a negative or positive  
temperature coefficient.  
overshoot — The amount by which a process variable  
exceeds the set point before it stabilizes.  
P control — Proportioning control.  
PD control — Proportioning control with derivative (rate)  
action.  
retransmit output — An analog output signal that may  
PDR control — Proportional derivative control with manu-  
al reset, used in fast responding systems where the reset  
causes instabilities. With PDR control, an operator can  
enter a manual reset value that eliminates droop in the  
system.  
be scaled to represent the process value or set point value.  
RTD — See resistance temperature detector.  
slidewire feedback — A method of controlling the position  
of a valve. It uses a potentiometer to vary resistance and  
indicate position of the valve.  
PI control — Proportioning control with integral (automat-  
ic reset) action.  
switching sensitivity — In on/off control, the tempera-  
ture change necessary to change the output from full on to  
full off. See hysteresis.  
PID — Proportional, integral, derivative. A control mode  
with three functions: proportional action dampens the sys-  
tem response, integral corrects for droop, and derivative  
prevents overshoot and undershoot.  
thermal system — A regulated environment that consists  
of a heat source, heat transfer medium or load, sensing  
device and a control instrument.  
process variable — The parameter that is controlled or  
measured. Typical examples are temperature, relative  
humidity, pressure, flow, fluid level, events, etc. The high  
process variable is the highest value of the process range,  
expressed in engineering units. The low process variable is  
the lowest value of the process range.  
thermocouple (t/c) — A temperature sensing device  
made by joining two dissimilar metals. This junction pro-  
duces an electrical voltage in proportion to the difference  
in temperature between the hot junction (sensing junction)  
and the leadwire connection to the instrument (cold junc-  
tion).  
proportional band (PB) — A range in which the propor-  
tioning function of the control is active. Expressed in  
units, degrees or percent of span. See PID.  
thermocouple break protection — The ability of a con-  
trol to detect a break in the thermocouple circuit and take  
a predetermined action.  
proportional control — A control using only the P (pro-  
portional) value of PID control.  
three-mode control — Proportioning control with integral  
rate band — A range in which the rate function of a con-  
troller is active. Expressed in multiples of the proportional  
band. See PID.  
(reset) and derivative (rate). Also see PID.  
time proportioning control — A method of controlling  
power by varying the on/off duty cycle of an output. This  
variance is proportional to the difference between the set  
point and the actual process temperature.  
ratio — A method by which the controller measures the  
flow of an uncontrolled variable and uses a proportion of it  
to control the flow of a second variable.  
zero cross — Action that provides output switching only  
at or near the zero-voltage crossing points of the ac sine  
wave. See burst fire.  
reference junction — See junction.  
reset — Control action that automatically eliminates off-  
set, or droop, between set point and actual process tem-  
zero switching — See zero cross.  
Appendix  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
A.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
•
Process, 0-20mA, 4-20mA into 800Ω maximum, 0-  
5VÎ (dc), 1-5VÎ (dc) or 0-10VÎ (dc) into 1kΩ mini-  
mum1, reverse acting, isolated.  
Electromechanical relay, Form A/B, 5A @ 120/240VÅ  
(ac), 6A @ 28VÎ (dc), 1/8 hp. @ 120VÅ (ac) or  
125VA @ 120VÅ (ac). Without contact suppression.  
External transmitter power supply, 5V ±5% @ 30mA,  
12V ±5% @ 30mA or 20V ±5% @ 30mA.  
Specifications  
(1234)  
Control Mode  
•
•
•
Dual input, quad output, optional retransmit of set  
point or process variable.  
Programmable direct and reverse acting control out-  
puts.  
•
•
EIA/TIA-232 communications or EIA/TIA-485, EIA/TIA-  
422 communications, opto-isolated.  
One-step auto-tuning.  
Accuracy  
•
Operator Interface  
Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: ± 0.1% of  
span, ±1 LSD, 77°F ± 5°F (25°C ± 3°C) ambient and  
rated line voltage ±10%.  
Accuracy span: 1000°F (540°C) minimum.  
Temperature stability: ± 0.2°F/°F (0.1°C/°C) change in  
ambient.  
Voltage stability: ± 0.01% of span /% of rated line volt-  
age.  
•
•
Local/remote set point capability.  
Dual, 4-digit LED displays: upper, 0.4” (10mm); lower,  
0.3” (8mm).  
•
•
•
Mode, Auto/Man, Display, Up and Down keys.  
Input  
•
•
Contact input for software function select.  
Type J, K, T, N, C(W5)2, D(W3)2, E, R, S, B, Pt 22  
thermocouple, 1° or 0.1° RTD.  
•
Agency Approvals  
•
•
•
0-50mVÎ (dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-5VÎ (dc), 1-5VÎ  
(dc), 0-10VÎ (dc) process.  
UL, C-UL File #43684  
CE: 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility  
Directive.  
EN 50081-2: 1994 Emissions.  
EN 50082-2: 1995 Immunity.  
73/23/EEC Low-Voltage Directive.  
EN 61010-1: 1993 Safety.  
NEMA 4X  
•
•
Slidewire, digital event input or heater current options.  
Sensor break protection de-energizes control output to  
protect system or selectable bumpless transfer to  
manual operation. Latching or non-latching.  
°F or °C display or process units, user selectable.  
•
•
•
Sensor Ranges  
J t/c:  
Terminals  
#6 compression universal head screws (tighten to 5  
inch/pounds maximum), accepts 20-14 gauge wire.  
Line Voltage/Power  
32 to 1500°F or  
0
to 816°C  
•
K t/c:  
T t/c:  
-328 to 2500°F or -200 to 1371°C  
-328 to 750°F or -200 to 399°C  
N t/c:  
R t/c:  
S t/c:  
32 to 2372°F or  
32 to 3200°F or  
32 to 3200°F or  
0
0
0
to 1300°C  
to 1760°C  
to 1760°C  
•
•
•
•
100 to 240VÅ 1 (ac) +10%/-15%, 50/60Hz, ± 5%.  
24 to 28V‡ 1 (ac/dc) +10%/-15%, 50/60Hz, ±5%.  
16VA maximum.  
Fused internally (factory replaceable only) Slo-Blo®  
type (time-lag): 2A, 250V for high-voltage versions;  
5A, 250V for low-voltage versions.  
B t/c:  
E t/c:  
1598 to 3300°F or 870 to 1816°C  
-328 to 1470°F or -200 to 799°C  
C t/c (W5)2:  
D t/c (W3)2:  
Pt 22:  
32 to 4200°F or  
32 to 4200°F or  
32 to 2543°F or  
0
0
0
to 2316°C  
to 2316°C  
to 1395°C  
•
Non-volatile memory retains data if power fails.  
Operating Environment  
•
32 to 149°F (0 to 65°C), 0 to 90% RH, non-condens-  
ing.  
1°RTD (JIS): -328 to 1166°F or -200 to 630°C  
1°RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472°F or -200 to 800°C  
0.1°RTD  
Storage Temperature  
-40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).  
•
Mechanical  
(JIS and DIN):-99.9 to 999.9°F or -73.3 to 537.7°C  
• 1/8 DIN panel mount, NEMA 4X (IP65 equivalent) front  
panel.  
0-5VÎ (dc):  
1-5VÎ (dc):  
0-10VÎ (dc): -999 to  
0-20mA:  
4-20mA:  
-999 to  
-999 to  
9999  
9999  
9999  
9999  
9999  
9999  
• Overall width x height x depth:  
horizontal - 4.03" x 2.18" x 4.74"  
(102mm x 55mm x 120mm);  
vertical - 2.18" x 4.03" x 4.74"  
(55mm x 102mm x 120mm).  
• Depth behind panel; 4.06" (103mm).  
• Weight: less than or equal to 14.0oz (0.40kg).  
Sample/Update Rates  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-999 to  
-999 to  
0-50mVÎ (dc):-999 to  
Slidewire:  
Current:  
Potentiometer:  
Output Options  
100 to 1200Ω  
0 to 50A  
0 to 1200Ω  
1 input: 10Hz.  
2 inputs: 5Hz.  
Retransmit: 1Hz.  
Remote set point: 1Hz.  
PID: 10Hz.  
Outputs: 10Hz.  
Display: 2Hz.  
•
Solid-state relay, 0.5A @ 24VÅ (ac) min., 253VÅ (ac)  
max., opto-isolated, burst fire. With or without contact  
suppression.  
•
•
Open collector: Max. voltage 42VÎ (dc), max. current  
1A.  
Switched dc signal: Min. turn-on voltage of 3VÎ (dc)  
into min. 500Ω load; max. On voltage not greater than  
32VÎ (dc) into an infinite load, isolated.  
Electromechanical relay1, Form C, 5A @ 120/240VÅ  
(ac), 6A @ 28VÎ (dc), 1/8 hp. @ 120VÅ (ac) or  
125VA @ 120VÅ (ac). With or without contact sup-  
pression. Off-state output impedance with RC sup-  
pression is 20kΩ.  
Alarm Outputs: 1 Hz  
Resolution  
•
•
Inputs: 16 bits.  
Outputs: 12 bits.  
•
1 Electromechanical relays are warranted for 100,000 clo-  
sures only. Solid-state switching devices are recom-  
mended for applications requiring fast cycle times or  
extended service life.  
2 Not an ANSI symbol.  
A.4  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranty/Returns  
Total  
Customer  
Satisfaction  
Warranty  
Returns  
The Watlow Series 988 is warranted to be free of  
defects in material and workmanship for 36 months  
after delivery to the first purchaser for use, providing  
that the units have not been misapplied. Since  
Watlow has no control over their use, and some-  
times misuse, we cannot guarantee against failure.  
Watlow's obligations hereunder, at Watlow's option,  
are limited to replacement, repair or refund of pur-  
chase price, and parts which upon examination  
prove to be defective within the warranty period  
specified. This warranty does not apply to damage  
resulting from transportation, alteration, misuse or  
abuse.  
1. Call Watlow Customer Service, (507) 454-5300,  
for a Return Material Authorization (RMA) num-  
ber before returning any item for repair. We  
need this information:  
• Ship to address  
• Contact name  
• Ship via  
• Bill to address  
• Phone number  
• Your P.O. number  
• Symptoms and/or special instructions  
• Name and phone number of person returning  
the material.  
2. Prior approval and an RMA number, from the  
Customer Service Department, is needed when  
returning any unused product for credit. Make  
sure the RMA number is on the outside of the  
carton, and on all paperwork returned. Ship on  
a Freight Prepaid basis.  
Watlow Controls  
Watlow Controls is a division of Watlow Electric Mfg.  
Co., St. Louis, Missouri, a manufacturer of industrial  
electric heating products since 1922. Watlow begins  
with a full set of specifications and completes an  
industrial product that is manufactured totally in-  
house, in the U.S.A. Watlow products include elec-  
tric heaters, sensors, controls and switching  
devices. The Winona operation has been designing  
solid state electronic control devices since 1962,  
and has earned the reputation as an excellent sup-  
plier to original equipment manufacturers. These  
OEMs depend upon Watlow Controls to provide  
compatibly engineered controls which they can  
incorporate into their products with confidence.  
Watlow Controls resides in a 100,000-square-foot  
marketing, engineering and manufacturing facility in  
Winona, Minnesota.  
3. After we receive your return, we will examine it  
and determine the cause for your action.  
4. In cases of manufacturing defect, we will enter  
a repair order, replacement order, or issue cred-  
it for material. A 20-percent restocking charge is  
applied for all returned stock controls and  
accessories.  
5. If the unit is unrepairable, it will be returned to  
you with a letter of explanation. Repair costs will  
not exceed 50 percent of the original cost.  
Shipping Claims  
When you receive your Watlow control, examine the  
package for any signs of external damage it may  
have sustained enroute. If there is apparent dam-  
age either outside the box or to its contents, make a  
claim with the shipper immediately. Save the origi-  
nal shipping carton and packing material.  
Appendix  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
A.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index a-h  
%OUT LED 3.1  
0-5VÎ (dc) process wiring  
input 1 2.8  
DIN A.2  
B
DIP switch functions 1.1 - 1.4  
DIP switch locations 1.1 - 1.4  
DIP switch setting  
input 1.2  
lockout 1.4  
output 1.3  
display 6.11  
Display Key 3.1  
Display Loop 3.2  
displays 3.1  
documentation, maintaining ii, 6.9  
Down-arrow Key 3.1  
droop A.2  
dual in-line package (DIP) switches 1.1 -  
1.4  
dual PID sets 9.8 - 9.9  
duty cycle A.2  
baud rate 4.45, 8.4  
brackets 2.1 - 2.3  
bumpless transfer 4.35, 7.4  
burst fire 8.1 - 8.3, A.2  
input 2 2.9  
output 1 2.12  
output 2 2.13  
0-10VÎ (dc) process wiring  
input 1 2.8  
C
input 2 2.9  
calibration curve, RTD 2 4.14  
calibration manual ii  
Calibration Menu 6.13 - 6.14  
lockout 6.6  
output 1 2.12  
output 2 2.13  
0-20mA process wiring  
input 1 2.8  
calibration offset A.2  
calibration offset 1 4.6  
calibration offset 2 4.14  
calibration offset adjustment 7.3  
cascade control 9.2 - 9.5, A.2  
auto-tuning 9.3  
input 2 2.9  
output 1 2.12  
output 2 2.13  
0-50mV (high impedance) wiring  
input 1 2.8  
duplex control 9.10 - 9.11  
input 2 2.9  
manual tuning 9.4  
cascade action 4.37  
cautions iii  
Celsius 4.35  
clearing error codes 7.10  
closed loop A.2  
cold junction A.2  
1-5VÎ (dc) process wiring  
input 1 2.8  
E
input 2 2.9  
environmental chamber 8.7  
error code messages 7.8  
error code results 7.10  
error codes, clearing 7.10  
error latching 4.36  
output 1 2.12  
output 2 2.13  
4-20mA process wiring  
input 1 2.8  
communications 8.4 - 8.5  
Communications Menu 4.44 - 4.48, 8.4  
lockout 6.6  
compression molding press 8.11  
consumer feedback iii  
controller chassis, removing 1.1, 7.5  
controlling output action 8.8  
control outputs off 8.8  
control type 4.36  
input 2 2.9  
output 1 2.12  
output 2 2.13  
event input 1 4.40  
event input 1 Status 5.4  
event input 1 wiring 2.11  
event input 2 4.40  
event input 2 status 5.4  
event input 2 wiring 2.10  
external signal conditioner  
power supply A.2  
A
access to panel back 2.2  
ac output wiring  
output 1 2.12  
crossover process value 4.39  
crossover set point value 4.39  
current 8.10  
current transformer 8.11, A.2  
current transformer input 2.10  
current transformer wiring 2.10  
cycle time  
output 1 5.13  
output 2 5.16  
cycle time adjustment 7.3  
power supply DIPs 1.3  
power supply wiring  
output 2 2.13  
output 2 2.13  
output 3 2.14  
output 4 2.15  
output 3 2.14  
output 4 2.15  
address 4.46  
alarm  
deviation 7.6  
process 7.6  
rate 7.7  
F
Factory Menus 6.1 - 6.14  
factory ship date 6.8  
failure mode 4.35  
Fahrenheit 4.35  
feedback iii  
filter time constants 8.12 - 8.13  
input 1 4.7  
input 2 4.15  
fluid sample container 9.11  
form A 7.5, A.2  
form B 7.5, A.2  
form C A.2  
alarm 2 4.23  
alarm 2 high 5.5  
alarm 2 low 5.4  
alarm 2 side 4.23  
alarm 3 4.25  
alarm 3 high 5.6  
alarm 3 low 5.5  
alarm 3 side 4.26  
alarm 4 4.28  
alarm 4 high 5.7  
alarm 4 low 5.6  
alarm 4 side 4.29  
alarm display, masked 7.6  
alarm high 5.2  
alarm jumper, changing 7.5  
alarm low 5.2  
D
data bits & parity 4.45, 8.4  
data communications ii, 2.15, 4.1, 8.4  
Da ta Communica tions w ith the Wa tlow  
Series 988 Fa mily of Controllers ii,  
2.15, 4.1, 4.44  
date 6.3  
dead band 5.16, 8.6 - 8.7  
sample application 8.7  
decimal 1 4.4  
front panel 3.1  
front panel lockout 6.3, 8.8  
decimal 2 4.11  
decimal point, location of 4.3, 4.35  
Declaration of Conformity A.12  
default 6.14, A.2  
G
alarm reset 8.8  
alarms 7.5 - 7.7  
gas-fired furnace 8.23  
Global Menu 4.34 - 4.43, 9.8  
lockout 6.5  
Glossary A.2 - A.3  
ground loops 2.4 - 2.5  
derivative A.2  
alarms, latching 7.7  
alarms, non-latching 7.7  
alarm silencing 7.7  
algorithm 4.38, 9.3  
ambient temperature 6.3  
analog output 4.31  
annunciator 4.41, A.2  
Auto/Manual key 3.1, 7.4  
Auto/Manual LED 3.1, 7.4  
auto/manual operation 7.4, 8.8  
automatic operation 7.4  
auto-tune 5.7  
output 1 5.12  
output 2 5.15  
deviation alarm 7.6  
device address 8.4  
DEV LED (set point deviation) 3.1  
Diagnostics Menu 6.7 - 6.12  
lockout 6.6  
differential control 9.6 - 9.7  
digital event input options 8.8 - 8.9  
digital event wiring  
H
heater with digital event 8.9  
heater current 8.10 - 8.11  
heat-treat oven 8.21  
high power limit 4.42  
humidity chamber 8.13  
hunt 4.16, 8.22, 8.23  
hunting A.2  
input 1 2.11  
input 2 2.10  
dimensions 2.1  
auto-tune set point 4.42  
auto-tuning 7.1, 9.3  
Appendix  
A.6  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index h-r  
L4 (output 4) 3.1  
latching 2 4.24  
latching 3 4.27  
latching 4 4.30  
hysteresis A.2  
process retransmit 2.14  
switched dc, open collector 2.14  
output 4 4.28  
output 4 wiring 2.15  
hysteresis 1 4.20  
hysteresis 2 4.22  
hysteresis 3 4.26  
hysteresis 4 4.29  
latching alarm 7.7  
ac outputs 2.15  
learn high range 4.13  
learn low range 4.13  
linearization A.2  
linearization, input 8.14 - 8.15  
linearization 1 4.8  
external transmitter power supply 2.15  
switched dc, open collector 2.15  
output configurations  
output 1 (control) 3.1  
output 2 (control or alarm) 3.1  
output 3 (alarm or retransmit) 3.1  
output 4 (alarm or communications) 3.1  
output DIP switches 1.3  
Output Menu 4.18 - 4.33  
lockout 6.5  
I
idle set point 5.3, 8.8  
inner loop, cascade 9.2 - 9.3  
input 1 4.3 - 4.8  
linearization 2 4.15  
local-remote 5.8  
input 1 wiring 2.8  
locating DIP switches 1.1 - 1.4  
Lockout, Panel Menu 6.2 - 6.6  
lockout DIP switch 1.4  
lockout level, setting 6.2 - 6.6  
loop error detect 8.10  
lower display 3.1  
0-5VÎ (dc) process 2.8  
0-10VÎ (dc) process 2.8  
0-20mA process 2.8  
0-50mV (high impedance) 2.8  
1-5VÎ (dc) process 2.8  
4-20mA process 2.8  
RTD (2- or 3-wire) 2.8  
thermocouple 2.8  
output module types 6.10  
output power supply  
output 2 2.13  
output 3 2.14  
output 4 2.15  
low power limit 4.41  
lube oil tank 9.5  
overriding alarms 7.7  
overshoot A.3  
input 2 4.9 -4.16  
input 2 wiring 2.9 - 2.10  
0-5VÎ (dc) process 2.9  
0-10VÎ (dc) process 2.9  
0-20mA process 2.9  
0-50mV (high impedance) 2.9  
1-5VÎ (dc) process 2.9  
4-20mA process 2.9  
current transformer input 2.10  
digital event input 2 2.10  
potentiometer input 2.10  
RTD (2- or 3-wire) 2.9  
slidewire feedback 2.10  
thermocouple 2.9  
M
maintaining documentation ii, 6.9  
manual operation 7.4  
manual tuning 7.2  
P
P control A.3  
mechanical relay 7.2  
menu lockout 6.2 - 6.6  
mixing tank 9.13  
Mode Key 3.1, 8.23  
Modbus 8.4  
model number ii, iii, A.11  
module types 6.9 - 6.10  
mounting 2.1 - 2.3  
panel back access 2.2  
panel cutouts 2.1 - 2.2  
Panel Lockout Menu 6.2 - 6.6  
PD control A.3  
PDR control A.3  
PI control A.3  
PID 2 crossover selection 4.38  
PID control A.3  
muffle furnace 8.17  
PID A Menu 5.9 - 5.16  
PID B Menu 5.9 - 5.16  
PID Menu lockout 6.4  
PID parameters 7.1, 9.8  
PID sets, switching 8.8  
PLOC Menu 6.2  
potentiometer wiring 2.10  
power supply (see external signal conditioner)  
DIP switches 1.3  
input DIP switches 1.2  
0-5V 1.2  
0-10V 1.2  
0-20mA 1.2  
0-50mV 1.2  
0-50mV (high impedance) 1.2  
1-5 1.2  
4-20mA 1.2  
RTD 1.2  
thermocouple 1.2  
N
National Electric Code (NEC) 2.4, 2.6, 2.7  
NEMA 4X seal 2.3, A.2  
non-latching alarm 7.7  
notes iii  
output 2 2.13  
output 3 2.14  
output 4 2.15  
O
input filter 8.12 - 8.13  
input linearization 8.14 - 8.15  
Input Menu 4.2 - 4.17  
lockout 6.5  
input module 6.9  
input ranges (tables)  
input 1 4.5 - 4.6  
on/off control A.2  
Operation Menus 5.1 - 5.16  
operation parameters, manual tuning 7.2  
open loop 6.12, A.2  
ordering information A.5  
outer loop, cascade 9.2 - 9.3  
output A.2  
power wiring 2.4  
process variable A.3  
process 1 4.20  
process 2 4.21  
process 3 4.31  
process alarm 7.6  
input 2 4.12  
output 1 4.19  
output 1 wiring 2.12  
process retransmit wiring 2.14  
process value, 8.16  
proportional band A.3  
output 1 5.10  
input-to-output isolation 2.4, 2.13 - 2.15  
installation 2.1 - 2.3  
integral A.2  
output 1 5.11  
output 2 5.14  
interface type 4.47  
isolation 2.4, A.2  
0-5VÎ (dc) process 2.12  
0-10VÎ (dc) process 2.12  
0-20mA process 2.12  
1-5VÎ (dc) process 2.12  
4-20mA process 2.12  
ac outputs 2.12  
output 2 5.13  
proportional band adjustment 7.3  
proportioning control A.3  
protocol type 4.46, 8.4  
switched dc, open collector 2.12  
output 2 4.21  
output 2 wiring 2.13  
J
Q, R  
JIS A.2  
0-5VÎ (dc) process 2.13  
0-10VÎ (dc) process 2.13  
0-20mA process 2.13  
1-5VÎ (dc) process 2.13  
4-20mA process 2.13  
ac outputs 2.13  
ramping function 4.43, 8.16  
ramp rate 4.43, 8.16  
ramp to set point 8.16 - 8.17  
range high 1 4.5 - 4.6  
range high 2 4.11 - 4.12  
range low 1 4.5 - 4.6  
range low 2 4.11 - 4.12  
rate  
jumper location 7.5  
junctions A.2  
K
keys 3.1  
external transmitter power supply 2.13  
switched dc, open collector 2.13  
output 3 4.25  
L
output 1 5.12  
output 2 5.15  
rate alarm 7.7, 8.17  
rate band A.3  
output 3 wiring 2.14  
L1 (output 1) 3.1  
L2 (output 2) 3.1  
L3 (output 3) 3.1  
ac outputs 2.14  
external transmitter power supply 2.14  
Appendix  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
A.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index r-z  
Prompt Index  
rate/derivative adjustment 7.3  
ratio control 9.12 - 9.13, A.3  
reference junction A.2  
relay, mechanical 7.2  
release tabs 1.1, 2.2 - 2.3, 7.5  
remote set point 4.10, 8.8, 8.18 - 8.19  
removing controller chassis 1.1, 2.2 - 2.3,  
7.5  
temperature limit control protection 2.6  
terminal designation stickers 2.4  
test chambers  
wih communications 8.5  
with dual PID sets 9.9  
test displays 6.11  
[----](error) 7.8  
A
[A2HI](alarm 2 high) 5.5, 8.17  
[A2LO](alarm 2 low) 5.4, 8.17  
[A2Sd](alarm 2 side) 4.23  
[A3HI](alarm 3 high) 5.6  
test output 6.11  
thermal system A.3  
thermocouple 2.5, A.3  
thermocouple break protection A.3  
thermocouple wiring  
input 1 2.8  
reset  
output 1 5.11  
output 2 5.14  
reset/integral adjustment 7.3  
restore 6.14  
retransmit 8.20 - 8.21, A.3  
retransmit calibration offset 4.33  
retransmit high limit 4.32  
retransmit low limit 4.32  
RTD A.3  
RTD calibration curve 1 4.7  
RTD calibration curve 2 4.14  
RTD input 2.5  
[A3LO](alarm 3 low) 5.5  
[A3Sd](alarm 3 side) 4.26  
[A4HI](alarm 4 high) 5.7  
input 2 2.9  
[A4LO](alarm 4 low) 5.6  
three-mode control A.3  
time constant, filter  
input 1 4.7  
input 2 4.15  
time proportioning control A.3  
tuning  
[A4Sd](alarm 4 side) 4.29  
[ACAL](retransmit calibration offset) 4.33  
[Actn](control output action) 8.8  
[Addr](device address) 4.46  
[`AL2](alarm 2) 4.23  
]AL2n](alarm 2 reverse) 7.6  
[`AL3](alarm 3) 4.25  
[AL3n](alarm 3 reverse) 7.6  
{~AL4}(alarm 4) 4.28  
[AL4n[(alarm 4 reverse) 7.6  
[ALgO](algorithm) 4.38, 9.8  
[`ALr](alarm reset) 8.8  
[AMb](ambient temperature) 6.8  
[Anun](annunciator) 4.41  
[Aout](analog output) 4.31  
[`ArH](retransmit high limit) 4.32  
[`ArL](retransmit low limit) 4.32  
[AtSP](auto-tune set point) 4.42, 7.1  
[`AUt](auto-tune) 5.7, 7.2  
automatic 7.1 - 7.2  
manual 7.2 - 7.4  
settings 7.2 - 7.3  
RTD wiring  
input 1 2.8  
input 2 2.9  
RTU Modbus 8.4  
Tuning of Indus tria l Control Sys tems 7.1  
U
S
Up-arrow Key 3.1  
upper display 3.1  
using manual ii - iii  
safety practices 2.4, 2.6, 2.7  
semiconductor oven 8.3  
sensor installation 2.5  
sensor type  
V, W  
input 1 4.3  
input 2 4.9 - 4.10  
warnings iii  
serial number 6.8  
warranty A.5  
B
set point, in tuning 7.2 - 7.3  
set point, ramp to 8.16 - 8.17  
set point 1 3.2  
set point 2 5.1, 5.3  
set point 2 control 4.22  
setting DIP switches 1.1 - 1.4  
input 1.2  
lockout 1.4  
output 1.3  
Setup Menus 4.1 - 4.48  
shipping claims A.5  
silencing 2 4.24  
waste-water treatment 8.15  
water boiler 9.7  
wiring 2.1, 2.4 - 2.15  
event input 1 2.11  
event input 2 2.10  
input 1 2.8  
[bAUd](baud rate) 4.45  
[both](alarm 3 trigger) 4.26  
[bPLS](bumpless transfer) 4.35  
[brSt] (burst fire) 8.2  
input 2 2.9 - 2.10  
output 1 2.12  
output 2 2.13  
output 3 2.14  
output 4 2.15  
C
[`C_F](Celsius_Fahrenheit) 4.35  
[`CAL](calibration lockout) 6.6  
[`CAL](Calibration Menu) 6.13  
[CAL1](calibration offset 1) 4.6  
wiring example 2.6  
wiring safety 2.4, 2.6, 2.7  
silencing 3 4.27  
silencing 4 4.30  
[CAL2](calibration offset 2) 4.14  
[CntL](control type) 4.36  
[COM](Communications lockout) 6.6  
[COM](Communications Menu) 4.44, 8.4  
[CSAC](cascade action) 4.37  
silencing alarms 7.7  
slidewire feedback 8.22 - 8.23, A.3  
slidewire feedback wiring 2.10  
slidewire hysteresis 4.16  
software filter 1 4.7  
software filter 2 4.15  
software revision 6.8  
specifications A.4  
square root extraction (linearization,  
square root) 8.14 - 8.15, A.2  
storing data 8.4 - 8.5  
switched dc, open collector wiring  
output 1 2.12  
X, Y, Z  
zero switching A.3  
zone heating 8.19  
[CSCd](cascade control) 4.36  
[Ct1A](cycle time, output 1, PID A) 5.13, 8.2  
[Ct1b](cycle time, output 1, PID B) 5.13, 8.2  
[Ct2A](cycle time, output 2, PID A) 5.16, 8.2  
[Ct2b](cycle time, output 2, PID B) 5.16, 8.2  
[Curr](current) 8.10, 8.11  
D
[dAtA](data bits & parity) 4.45, 8.4  
[DAtE](factory ship date) 6.8  
output 2 2.13  
output 3 2.14  
output 4 2.15  
[``db](dead band) 5.16  
switching sensitivity A.3  
system heat-up profiles 9.2  
System Menu 5.1 - 5.8  
lockout 6.4  
[db`A](dead band PID A) 5.16, 8.6  
[db`b](dead band PID B) 5.16, 8.6  
[`dE1](deviation alarm input 1) 7.6  
[`dE2](deviation alarm input 2) 7.6  
[dE1A](derivative, output 1, PID A) 5.12  
[dE1b](derivative, output 1, PID B) 5.12  
[dE2A](derivative, output 2, PID A) 5.15  
[dE2b](derivative, output 2, PID B) 5.15  
[dEC1](decimal 1) 4.4  
T
technical assistance iii, 6.10  
Appendix  
A.8  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index—prompts  
[`LOC](front panel lockout) 6.3, 8.8  
[`LoP](low power limit) 4.41  
[LooP](loop error detect) 8.10  
[LOW](alarm 3 trigger) 4.26  
[`L-r](local-remote) 5.8  
[dEC2](decimal 2) 4.11  
[`dFL](default) 6.14  
[rtd2](RTD calibration curve 2) 4.14  
[diAg](Diagnostics Menu) 6.7  
[diAg](diagnostics lockout) 6.6  
[diFF](differential) 4.36, 9.7  
[`dir](direct action) 4.37  
[dISP](test displays) 6.11  
[dUPL](duplex) 4.38  
S
[LrnH](learn high) 4.13, 8.23  
[LrnL](learn low) 4.13, 8.23  
[`SEt](Setup Menu) 4.1  
[SHYS](slidewire hysteresis) 4.16  
[SIL2](silencing 2) 4.24  
[SIL3](silencing 3) 4.27  
[SIL4](silencing 4) 4.30  
[SLid](slidewire) 8.23  
M, N  
E
[Mod](Modbus) 4.46  
[`nLA](non-latching) 4.36  
[``no](none) 4.38, 9.8  
[`nor](normal) 4.36  
[E1`1](A/D underflow error) 7.8  
[E2`1](A/D underflow error) 7.8  
[E1`2](sensor under-range error) 7.8  
[E2`2](sensor under-range error) 7.8  
[E1`3](sensor over-range error) 7.8  
[E2`3](sensor over-range error) 7.8  
[E1`4](A/D overflow error) 7.8  
[E2`4](A/D overflow error) 7.8  
[`Ei1](event input 1) 4.40  
[``Sn](serial number) 6.8  
[SOFt](software revision) 6.8  
[`SP1](set point 1) 9.3  
[`SP2](set point 2) 5.3  
O
[SP2c](set point 2 control) 4.22  
[StPt](set point) 8.17, 9.8  
[StPt](crossover set point value) 4.39  
[Strt](start) 8.17  
[`SYS](system lockout) 6.4  
[`SyS](System Menu) 5.2  
[`OFF](control outputs off) 8.8  
[``on](on) 8.4, 8.19  
[OPEr](Operation Menus) 5.1 - 5.16  
[OPLP](open loop) 6.12, 7.9  
[`Ot1](output 1) 4.19  
[`Ot2](output 2) 4.21  
[`Ot3](output 3) 4.25  
[Ei1S](event input 1 status) 5.4  
[`Ei2](event input 2) 4.40 - 4.41  
[Ei2S](event input 2 status) 5.4  
[`Er3](ambient temperature error) 7.9  
[`Er4](RAM identification error) 7.9  
[`Er5(non-volatile checksum error) 7.9  
[`Er9(configuration error) 7.9  
[`Err](error latching) 4.36  
T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z  
[`Ot4](output 4) 4.28  
[OtPt](output lockout) 6.5  
[OtPt](Output Menu) 4.18  
[OtY1](output 1 module type) 6.10  
[OtY2](output 2 module type) 6.10  
[OtY3](output 3 module type) 6.10  
[OtY4](output 4 module type) 6.10  
[tout](test outputs) 6.11  
F
[FAIL](failure mode) 4.35  
[Ftr1](software filter 1) 4.7  
[Ftr2](software filter 2) 4.15  
[FULL](full) 4.46, 8.4  
P
[Pb1A](proportional band, output 1, PID A) 5.10  
[Pb1b](proportional band, output 1, PID B) 5.10  
[Pb2A](proportional band, output 2, PID A) 5.13  
[Pb2b](proportional band, output 2, PID B) 5.13  
[`Pid](switch PID sets) 4.38, 8.8  
[Pid2](PID 2 crossover selection) 4.38, 9.8  
[PidA](PID A Menu) 5.3, 9.8  
G
[gLbL](Global Menu) 4.34  
[gLbL](global lockout) 6.5  
[Pidb](PID B Menu) 5.3, 9.8  
[PidA](PID A lockout) 6.4  
[Pidb](PID B lockout) 6.4  
[PLOC](Panel Lockout Menu) 6.1 - 6.6  
[Pr`2](input 2 process ) 3.2, 8.10, 9.4  
[Prc1](process 1) 4.20  
[Prc2](process 2) 4.21  
[Prc3](process 3) 4.31  
H
[HigH](alarm 3 trigger) 4.26  
[`HiP](high power limit) 4.42  
[Hunt](hunt) 4.16, 8.22, 8.23  
[HYS1](hysteresis 1) 4.20  
[HYS2](hysteresis 2) 4.22  
[HYS3](hysteresis 3) 4.26  
[HYS4](hysteresis 4) 4.29  
[Proc](crossover process value) 4.39, 9.8  
[Prot](protocol type) 4.46, 8.4  
I
Q, R  
[IdSP](idle set point) 5.3, 8.8  
[`In1](input 1) 4.3 - 4.4  
[rA1A](rate, output 1, PID A) 5.12, 9.4  
[rA1b](rate, output 1, PID B) 5.12  
[rA2A](rate, output 2, PID A) 5.15  
[rA2b](rate, output 2, PID B) 5.15  
[rAtE](ramp rate) 4.43  
[`In2](input 2) 4.9  
[InPt](Input Menu) 4.2  
[InPt](input lockout) 6.5  
[IntF](interface type) 4.47  
[rAti](ratio) 4.36, 9.13  
[It1A](integral, output 1, PID A) 5.11  
[It1b](integral, output 1, PID B) 5.11  
[It2A](integral, output 2, PID A) 5.14  
[It2b](integral, output 2, PID B) 5.14  
[itY1](input 1 module type) 6.9  
[itY2](input 2 module type) 6.9  
[rE1A](reset, output 1, Pid A) 5.11, 9.4  
[rE1b](reset, output 1, PID B) 5.11  
[rE2A](reset, output 2, PID A) 5.14  
[rE2b](reset, output 2, PID B) 5.14  
[`reU](reverse action) 4.37  
[`rH1](range high 1) 4.5 - 4.6  
[`rH2](range high 2) 4.11 - 4.12, 8.11, 9.3  
[`rL1](range low 1) 4.5 - 4.6  
J, K, L  
[`LAt](latching) 4.36  
[`rL2](range low 2) 4.11 - 4.12, 8.11, 9.3  
[root](square root extraction) 8.14, 8.15  
[``rP](ramping function) 4.43, 8.17  
[`rSP](remote set point) 4.10, 8.8, 8.19  
[`rSt](restore) 6.14  
[LAt2](latching 2) 4.24  
[LAt3](latching 3) 4.27  
[LAt4](latching 4) 4.30  
[Lin1](input 1 linearization) 4.8, 8.14, 8.15  
[Lin2](input 2 linearization) 4.15, 8.14  
[rtd1](RTD calibration curve 1) 4.7  
Appendix  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
A.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Overview  
75  
Pr 2  
InSP  
0
50  
°F  
Press ¥ to exit  
any menu and  
Display Loop  
(Lower Display)  
Set point 1,  
Remote  
Process input 2  
Inner Loop  
set point  
DEV LED on  
% OUT LED on  
Process units  
reach the Display  
Loop at any time.  
set point or  
Ratio value  
(cascade only)  
Press µ to advance to the Operation  
menus. Outputs are still active.  
SP2  
(
(
(
)
)
)
Set point 2  
Operation Menus  
IdSP  
OPEr  
Idle set point  
Operation  
Figure A.10 -  
The Series 988 Map.  
>
(SyS)  
(PIDA)  
(System)  
(PIDA)  
(PIDB)  
(PIDB)  
Ei1S  
(
(
(
)
)
)
Pb1A  
(
(
(
)
)
)
Event input 1 status  
Event input 2 status  
Alarm 2 low  
Output 1 proportional band A  
Output 1 reset A  
Pb1b  
(
(
(
)
)
)
Output 1 proportional band B  
Output 1 reset B  
Ei2S  
rE1A  
It1A  
rE1b  
It1b  
˜
NOTE:  
A2LO  
A2HI  
A3LO  
A3HI  
Output 1 integral A  
Output 1 integral B  
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
rA1A  
dE1A  
Ct1A  
µ
Alarm 2 high  
Alarm 3 low  
Alarm 3 high  
Output 1 rate A  
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
rA1b  
dE1b  
Ct1b  
Output 1 rate B  
Output 1 derivative A  
Output 1 cycle time A  
Output 1 derivative B  
Output 1 cycle time B  
µ
This is a complete  
listing of all Series  
988 prompts.  
µ
A4LO  
A4HI  
AUt  
Pb2A  
rE2A  
It2A  
Alarm 4 low  
Alarm 4 high  
Auto-tune  
Output 2 proportional band A  
Output 2 reset A  
Pb2b  
rE2b  
It2b  
Output 2 proportional band B  
Output 2 reset B  
(
(
)
)
(
(
)
)
(
(
)
)
Output 2 integral A  
Output 2 integral B  
(
)
(
(
(
)
)
)
L-r  
rA2A  
dE2A  
Ct2A  
Local-remote  
Output 2 rate A  
(
(
(
)
)
)
rA2b  
dE2b  
Ct2b  
Output 2 rate B  
Output 2 derivative A  
Output 2 cycle time A  
Output 2 derivative B  
Output 2 cycle time B  
Not all prompts will  
appear on your con-  
trol. They are  
dependent on your  
configuration and  
model number.  
(
)
db A  
Dead band A  
(
)
db b  
Dead band B  
Press > and < for 3 seconds to enter  
the Setup menus. Outputs are disabled.  
Setup Menus  
>
µ
(OtPt)  
(COM)  
(Output)  
(Communications)  
(InPt)  
(Global)  
(gLbL)  
(Input)  
bAUd  
dAtA  
Prot  
(
(
(
)
)
)
Baud rate  
Ot1  
(
(
(
)
)
)
Output 1  
(
)
)
)
)
In1  
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Input 1  
C_F  
Celcius_Fahrenheit µ  
Data bits and parity  
Protocol type  
Address  
Prc1  
HYS1  
Ot2  
Process 1  
Hysteresis 1  
dEC1  
rL1  
(
(
(
Decimal place 1  
Range low 1  
FAIL  
Err  
Failure mode  
Error latching  
Control type  
(
(
)
)
Addr  
intF  
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
Output 2  
rH1  
Range high 1  
To navigate:  
CntL  
Interface type  
Prc2  
HYS2  
Process 2  
Hysteresis 2  
CAL1  
Calibration offset 1  
CSAC  
ALgO  
(
)
Cascade action  
Press ¥ to return  
to the Display Loop  
from any location and  
to advance through  
the Display Loop.  
rtd1  
RTD calibration curve 1  
Input 1 software filter  
Input 1 linearization  
(
)
Control algorithm  
SP2c  
AL2  
Control set point 2  
Alarm 2  
Ftr1  
Lin1  
(
)
Pid2  
Proc  
PID 2 crossover selection  
Crossover process value  
Crossover set point value  
Event input 1  
(
(
(
)
)
)
(
(
(
)
)
)
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
A2Sd  
LAt2  
Alarm 2 side  
In2  
Input 2  
StPt  
Latching for alarm 2  
rSP  
µ
Remote set point  
Ei1  
(
(
)
)
SIL2  
Ot3  
Silence alarm 2  
Output 3  
(
(
(
)
)
)
dEC2  
rL2  
Decimal place 2  
Range low 2  
Event input 2  
Ei2  
Annunciator  
Anun  
LoP  
AL3  
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
Alarm 3  
rH2  
Range high 2  
Low power limit  
High power limit  
Auto-tune set point  
Ramping function  
Ramp rate  
A3Sd  
µ
Alarm 3 side  
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
LrnL  
LrnH  
Learn range low  
Press > or < to  
move between the  
menus.  
HYS3  
LAt3  
HiP  
Hysteresis 3  
Learn range high  
Latching for alarm 3  
AtSP  
rP  
CAL2  
rtd2  
Calibration offset 2  
RTD calibration curve 2  
Input 2 software filter  
Input 2 linearization  
SIL3  
Ot4  
Silence alarm 3  
Output 4  
(
)
Ftr2  
rAtE  
(
(
)
)
AL4  
Lin2  
Alarm 4  
A4Sd  
Press µ to  
advance through a  
menu.  
Alarm 4 side  
Hysteresis 4  
Hunt  
Slidewire dead band  
(
(
)
)
HYS4  
SHyS  
Slidewire inner  
hysteresis  
LAt4  
SIL4  
Latching for alarm 4  
Silence alarm 4  
(
(
)
)
Aout  
Prc3  
Analog output  
Process 3  
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
Hold µ while  
A
r L  
Retransmit low limit  
A r H  
ACAL  
Retransmit high limit  
Retransmit cal. offset  
pressing > to  
move backwards  
through the menus.  
At the [`SEt]prompt, press > and < another  
3 seconds to enter the Factory menus.  
(
)
Fcty  
Factory  
Factory Menus  
>
Press > or < to  
select prompt values.  
(Calibration)  
(Panel Lockout)  
Front Panel lockout  
(diAg)  
(
(Diagnostics)  
(CAL)  
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
b380  
b10U  
LOC  
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Factory ship date  
dAtE  
A 50  
A 00  
tc  
(
(
(
)
)
)
SyS  
PidA  
Pidb  
InPt  
OtPt  
System menu lockout  
PIDA menu lockout  
(
(
(
(
(
SOFt  
Sn  
Software revision  
Serial number  
b 0U  
b20A  
b 4A  
b 0u  
b100  
1 4  
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
µ
PIDB menu lockout  
Input menu lockout  
Output menu lockout  
Global menu lockout  
AMb  
Acnt  
gnd  
Ambient temperature  
Ambient A/D count  
Ground A/D count  
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
A 0H  
A 20  
A 15  
NOTE:  
µ
The controller will  
not default back to  
normal display  
while in the Factory  
Menu. All outputs  
are disabled while  
in this menu.  
gLbL  
COM  
cnt1  
cnt2  
ity1  
(
(
(
)
)
)
Input 1 A/D count  
Input 2 A/D count  
A380  
A10U  
A 0u  
(
(
(
)
)
)
Communications menu lockout  
Diagnostics menu lockout  
1 20  
Input 1 module  
diAg  
CAL  
1 0  
(
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
Input 2 module  
Calibration menu lockout  
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
ity2  
A20A  
A 4A  
1 10  
2 4  
Output 1 module  
Output 2 module  
Output 3 module  
Oty1  
Oty2  
Oty3  
A 0u  
2 20  
2 0  
A100  
b 50  
b 00  
Output 4 module  
Test displays  
Oty4  
dISP  
tout  
2 10  
3 LO  
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
µ
Test output  
Open loop  
b 0H  
b 20  
3 HI  
rSt  
OPLP  
Restore factory values  
Default prompts  
b 15  
dFL  
Appendix  
A.10 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model Number  
Ordering Information  
(1237)  
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:  
9 8 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _  
Series 988: a single-channel, temperature/process controller,  
1 analog input, 1 digital input, 1 analog or digital input, 4 outputs.  
Power Supply & Mounting  
6
7
8
9
= 24 to 28Vı (ac/dc) nominal, vertical mounting  
= 24 to 28Vı (ac/dc) nominal, horizontal mounting  
= 100 to 240Vı (ac/dc) nominal vertical mounting  
= 100 to 240Vı (ac/dc) nominal horizontal mounting  
Software  
A
B
= Standard  
= Enhanced (Includes cascade, ratio, |  
duplex, dual PID set)  
Input 1  
1
2
= Thermocouple only (Excluding Type B, R, and S)  
= Universal signal conditioner  
Input 2  
0
1
2
3
4
5
= None  
= Thermocouple only (Excluding Type B, R, and S)  
= Universal signal conditioner  
= Slidewire feedback  
= Current transformer2  
= Digital contact event (One digital event is standard on all units)  
Output 1  
B
C
D
E
F
= Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression (NO & C)  
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated  
= Electromechanical relay1, Form C, 5A with RC suppression  
= Electromechanical relay1, Form C, 5A without contact suppression  
= Universal process, 0-5VÎ (dc), 1-5VÎ (dc), 0-10VÎ (dc),  
0-20mA, 4-20mA, isolated  
K
= Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression (NO & C)  
Output 2  
A
B
C
D
E
F
= None  
= Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression (NO & C)  
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated  
= Electromechanical relay1, Form C, 5A with RC suppression (NO, NC & C)  
= Electromechanical relay1, Form C, 5A without contact suppression (NO, NC & C)  
= Universal process 0-5VÎ (dc), 1-5VÎ (dc), 0-10VÎ (dc),  
0-20mA, 4-20mA, isolated  
K
T
= Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression (NO & C)  
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ (dc) @ 30mA  
Output 3  
A
B
C
J
K
M
N
T
= None  
= Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression (NO & C)  
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated  
= Electromechanical relay1, Form A or B, 5A without contact suppression (NO or NC)  
= Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A without contact suppression (NO & C)  
= Retransmit, 0-20mA, 4-20mA  
= Retransmit, 0-5VÎ (dc), 1-5VÎ (dc), 0-10VÎ (dc)  
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ (dc) @ 30mA  
1Electromechanical relays  
warranted for 100,000 clo-  
sures only. Solid-state  
switching devices recom-  
mended for applications  
requiring fast cycle times or  
extended service life.  
Output 4  
A
B
C
D
E
K
R
S
T
= None  
= Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression (NO & C)  
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated  
= Electromechanical relay1, Form C, 5A with RC suppression (NO, NC & C)  
= Electromechanical relay1, Form C, 5A without contact suppression (NO, NC & C)  
= Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A without contact suppression (NO & C)  
= EIA/TIA-232 communications, opto-isolated  
2A Current Transformer input  
cannot be used in conjunc-  
tion with a process output  
installed on output 1.  
= EIA/TIA-485 / EIA/TIA-422 communications, opto-isolated  
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ (dc) @ 30mA  
= EIA/TIA-485 / EIA/TIA-232 communications, opto-isolated  
U
Display  
GG = Green/Green displays  
GR = Green/Red displays  
RG = Red/Green displays  
RR  
XX  
=
=
Red/Red displays  
Custom overlays or default settings  
Slo-Blo® is a registered  
trademark of Littelfuse, Inc.  
Appendix  
WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
A.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of Conformity  
Erklärt, daß das folgende Produkt:  
Deutsch  
Series 986, 987, 988, 989  
WATLOW CONTROLS  
96  
Beschreibung:  
Serie 986, 987, 988, 989  
Modellnummer(n):  
9 8 (6 7 8 oder 9) (beliebiger Buchstabe) - (1 oder 2)  
(0 1 2 3 4 oder 5) (B C D E F oder K) (A B C D E F K  
oder T) - (A B C J K M N oder T) (A B C D E K R S  
oder T) (2 beliebige Buchstaben)  
1241 Bundy Boulevard  
Winona, Minnesota 55987 USA  
Klassifikation:  
Regelsystem, Installationskategorie II, Emissionsgrad II  
Nennspannung:  
Nennfrequenz:  
Stromverbrauch:  
100 bis 240 V~ (ac) oder 24 bis 28 V‡ (ac/dc)  
50/60 Hz  
Max. 16 VA  
Declares that the following product:  
English  
Erfüllt die wichtigsten Normen der folgenden Anweisung(en) der Europäischen  
Union unter Verwendung der untenstehenden einschlägigen Dokumente:  
Designation:  
Series 986, 987, 988, 989  
89/336/EEC Elektromagnetische Übereinstimmungsanweisung  
Model Number(s):  
9 8 (6, 7, 8 or 9) (Any letter) - (1 or 2) (0 1 2 3 4 or 5)  
(B C D E F or K) (A B C D E F K or T) - (A B C J K M  
N or T) (A B C D E K R S or T) (Any two letters)  
EN 50082-2:  
1995 EMC-Rahmennorm für Störsicherheit, Teil 2: Industrielle  
Umwelt  
EN 61000-4-2: 1995 Elektrostatische Entladung  
EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Elektrische schnelle Stöße  
Classification:  
Rated Voltage:  
Rated Frequency:  
Control, Installation Category II, Polution Degree II  
100 to 240V~ (ac) or 24 to 28V‡ (ac/dc)  
50/60 Hz  
ENV 50140:  
ENV 50141:  
ENV 50204:  
1994 Strahlungsimmunität  
1994 Leitungsimmunität  
1995 Mobiltelefon  
Rated Power Consumption: 16VA maximum  
Meets the essential requirements of the following European Union Directive(s)  
using the relevant section(s) of the normalized standards and related documents  
shown:  
EN 50081-2:  
1994 EMC-Rahmennorm für Emissionen, Teil 2: Industrielle  
Umwelt  
EN 55011:  
1991 Beschränkungen und Methoden der Messung von  
Funkstörungsmerkmalen industrieller, wissenschaftlicher und  
medizinischer Hochfrequenzgeräte (Klasse A)  
89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive  
EN 50082-2:  
1995 EMC Generic immunity standard, Part 2: Industrial  
environment  
EN 61000-3-2: 1995 Grenzen der Oberwellenstromemissionen  
EN 61000-3-3: 1995 Grenzen der Spannungsschwankungen und Flimmern  
EN 61000-4-2: 1995 Electrostatic discharge  
EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Electical fast transients  
72/23/EEC Niederspannungsrichtlinie zu entsprechen  
ENV 50140:  
ENV 50141:  
ENV 50204:  
EN 50081-2:  
1994 Radiated immunity  
1994 Conducted immunity  
1995 Cellular phone  
1994 EMC Generic emission standard, Part 2: Industrial  
environment  
1991 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance  
characteristics of industrial, scientific and medical radio-  
frequency equipment (Class A)  
EN 61010-1:  
1993 Sicherheitsrichtlinien für Elektrogeräte zur Messung, zur  
Steuerung und im Labor, Teil 1: Allgemeine Richtlinien  
Declara que el producto siguiente:  
Español  
EN 55011:  
Designación:  
Números de modelo:  
Series 986, 987, 988, 989  
9 8 (6 7 8 ó 9)(Cualquier letra) - (1 ó 2)(0 1 2 3 4 ó  
5)(B C D E F o K)(A B C D E F K o T) - (A B C J K M  
N o T)(A B C D E K R S o T)(Cualquier combinación  
de dos letras)  
Control, categoría de instalación II, grado de  
contaminación ambiental II  
EN 61000-3-2: 1995 Limits for harmonic current emissions  
EN 61000-3-3: 1995 Limitations of voltage fluctuations and flicker  
73/23/EEC Low-Voltage Directive  
Clasificación:  
EN 61010-1:  
1993 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for  
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1:  
General requirements  
Tensión nominal:  
Frecuencia nominal:  
Consumo nominal  
de energía:  
100 a 240 V~ (Vca) o 24 a 28V ‡ (Vca/Vcc)  
50/60 Hz  
Déclare que le produit suivant :  
Français  
16 VA máximo  
Désignation :  
Numéro(s) de modèle(s) :  
Série 986, 987, 988, 989  
Cumple con los requisitos esenciales de las siguientes directivas de la Unión  
Europea, usando las secciones pertinentes de las reglas normalizadas y los  
documentos relacionados que se muestran:  
98 (6, 7, 8 ou 9) (lettre quelconque) - (1 ou 2) (0, 1, 2,  
3, 4 ou 5) (B, C, D, E, F ou K) (A, B, C, D, E, F, K ou  
T) - (A, B, C, J, K, M, N ou T) (A, B, C, D, E, K, R, S,  
ou T) (deux lettres quelconques)  
Commande, installation catégorie II, degré de  
pollution II  
89/336/EEC - Directiva de compatibilidad electromagnética  
EN 50082-2:  
1995 Norma de inmunidad genérica del EMC, parte 2:  
Ambiente industrial  
Classification :  
EN 61000-4-2: 1995 Descarga electrostática  
EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Perturbaciones transitorias eléctricas rápidas  
Tension nominale :  
Fréquence nominale :  
Consommation  
100 à 240 V ~ ou 24 à 28 V ‡ (c.a./c.c.)  
50/60 Hz  
ENV 50140:  
ENV 50141:  
ENV 50204:  
EN 50081-2:  
1994 Inmunidad radiada  
1994 Inmunidad conducida  
1995 Teléfono portátil  
1994 Norma de emisión genérica del EMC, parte 2: Ambiente  
industrial  
d’alimentation nominale :  
16 VA maximum  
Conforme aux exigences de la (ou des) directive(s) suivantes de l’Union  
Européenne figurant aux sections correspondantes des normes et documents  
associés ci-dessous :  
EN 55011:  
1991 Límites y métodos de medición de características de  
perturbaciones de radio correspondientes a equipos de  
radiofrecuencia industriales, científicos y médicos (Clase A)  
89/336/EEC Directive de compatibilité électromagnétique  
EN 61000-3-2: 1995 Límites para emisiones de corriente armónica  
EN 61000-3-3: 1995 Limitaciones de fluctuaciones del voltaje  
EN 50082-2 :  
1995 Norme générique d’insensibilité électromagnétique,  
Partie 2 : Environnement industriel  
73/23/EEC Directiva de baja tensión  
EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Décharge électrostatique  
EN 61000-4-4 : 1995 Courants électriques transitoires rapides  
EN 61010-1:  
1993 Requerimientos de seguridad para equipos eléctricos  
de medición, control y uso en laboratorios, Parte 1:  
Requerimientos generales  
ENV 50140 :  
ENV 50141 :  
ENV 50204 :  
1994 Insensibilité à l’énergie rayonnée  
1994 Insensibilité à l’énergie par conduction  
1995 Téléphone cellulaire  
EN 50081-2 :  
1994 Norme générique sur les émissions électromagnétiques,  
Partie 2 : Environnement industriel  
EN 55011 :  
1991 Limites et méthodes de mesure des caractéristiques  
d’interférences du matériel radiofréquence industriel,  
scientifique et médical (Classe A)  
Erwin D. Lowell  
Name of Authorized Representative  
Winona, Minnesota, USA  
Place of Issue  
EN 61000-3-2 : 1995 Limites d’émission d’harmoniques  
EN 61000-3-3 : 1995 Limitations d’écarts de tension et de papillotement  
General Manager  
Title of Authorized Representative  
January 9, 1996  
Date of Issue  
73/23/EEC Directive liée aux basses tensions  
EN 61010-1 :  
1993 Exigences de sécurité pour le matériel électrique de  
mesure, commande et de laboratoire, Partie 1 :  
Exigences générales  
_
Signature of Authorized Representative  
(1230)  
Appendix  
A.12 WATLOW Series 988 User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Watlow Series 988 User’s Manual  
Watlow Controls, 1241 Bundy Blvd., P.O. Box 5580, Winona, MN 55987-5580, Phone: 507/454-5300, Fax: 507/452-4507  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tektronix Switch VX4353 User Manual
Telex Video Game Headset PH 81 User Manual
Thermos Charcoal Grill 461410707 User Manual
Toastmaster Coffeemaker ME5CB User Manual
Toshiba CRT Television 20AF41 User Manual
TP Link Network Router TL MR3046 User Manual
Uniden Electronic Keyboard ALP 9080 User Manual
Vizio TV Antenna E322VL User Manual
VocoPro Cassette Player CDG X 3 Mark II User Manual
VocoPro Laser Pointer UHF 3200 User Manual